Acura - Auto - acura-ilx-hybrid-2015-owner-s-manual-89856
Document Details
Summary of Content
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Event Data Recorders
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
A Few Words About Safety
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
Contents
Main Menu
2015 ILX HYBRID Online Reference Owner's Manual
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
2 Safe Driving P. 27
For Safe Driving P. 28
Seat Belts P. 32
Airbags P. 39
2 Instrument Panel P. 69
Indicators P. 70
Gauges and Multi-Information Display P. 86
2 Controls P. 103
Setting the Clock P. 104
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 105
Opening and Closing the Moonroof P. 123
Adjusting the Seats P. 135 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 141
2 Features P. 151
Audio System P. 152
Audio System Basic Operation P. 155
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 187
This owner's manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2 Driving P. 219
Before Driving P. 220
Multi-View Rear Camera P. 253
Towing a Trailer P. 225
Refueling P. 254
2 Maintenance P. 259
Before Performing Maintenance P. 260
Maintenance MinderTM P. 263
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 292
Climate Control System Maintenance P. 305
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 311
Tools P. 312
Overheating P. 335
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 313
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 337
2 Information P. 345
Specifications P. 346
Emissions Testing P. 351
Identification Numbers P. 348
Warranty Coverages P. 353
Note: All page numbers referenced in this document are hyperlinked.
2015 ILX HYBRID Online Reference Owner's Manual
Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 54
Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 114
Security System P. 118
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 124
Climate Control System P. 146
Audio Error Messages * P. 180
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 189
Braking P. 248
Accessories and Modifications P. 257
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 268
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 294
Cleaning P. 306
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 282
12 Volt Battery P. 303
Engine Does Not Start P. 329
Fuses P. 341
Jump Starting P. 332
Emergency Towing P. 344
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 349
Authorized Manuals P. 355
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 120
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 133
General Information on the Audio System P. 183
When Driving P. 226
Fuel Economy P. 256
Reporting Safety Defects P. 350
Client Service Information P. 356
P. 4
Safety Labels P. 67
Safe Driving
P. 27
Instrument Panel
P. 69
Controls
P. 103
Features
P. 151
Driving
P. 219
Maintenance
P. 259
Handling the Unexpected
P. 311
Information
P. 345
Index
P. 357
Parking Your Vehicle P. 252
Remote Transmitter Care P. 304
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 334
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ ECON Button (P 239)
❙ System Indicators (P 70)
❙ Gauges (P 86)
❙ Multi-Information Display (P 87)
❙ Audio/Information Screen * (P 156)
❙ Navigation System *
() See the Navigation System Manual
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Audio System (P 152)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 124)
❙ Climate Control System (P 146)
❙ Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror Button (P 132)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 132)
❙
4
(Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 244)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down)
(P 234)
❙ Remote Audio Control Buttons (P 159)
❙ Brightness Control (P 131)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) (P 234)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 130)
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 126)
❙ Fog Lights (P 129)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons (P 240)
❙ SEL/RESET Button (P 87)
❙
(Information) Button (P 87)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
() See the Navigation System Manual
❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P 189)
* Not available on all models
5
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Power Window Switches (P 120)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 112)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 134)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P 133)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 42)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 42)
❙ Parking Brake (P 248)
❙ USB Adapter Cable (P153 )
❙ Shift Lever
Continuous Variable
Transmission (CVT) (P 231)
❙ Glove Box (P 142)
❙ Seat Heater Switches *
(P 145)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P 153)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 342)
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 269)
❙ Trunk Release (P 114)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 255)
6
(P 144)
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 49)
❙ Coat Hook (P 144)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Seat Belts (P 32)
❙ Moonroof Switch (P 123)
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Ceiling Light (P 141)
❙ Map Lights (P 141)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
❙ Front Seat (P 135)
❙ Side Airbags (P 46)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 61)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 63)
❙ Rear Seat
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 59)
* Not available on all models
7
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide
❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 268)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 130, 292)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 134)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 107)
❙ Headlights (P 126, 282)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Parking/
Side Marker Lights (P 126, 286, 287)
❙ Tires (P 294, 313)
❙ Fog Lights (P 129, 284)
8
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 291)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 114)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 117)
Quick Reference Guide
❙ How to Refuel (P 255)
❙ Trunk Release Button (P 115)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 253)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 290)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 288)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P 288)
❙ Rear Side Marker Lights (P 288)
9
Eco Assist System
Quick Reference Guide
ECON Mode Indicator (P80)
Comes on when ECON mode is on.
ECON Button (P239)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
10
The message is displayed for a
few seconds when ECON mode
is turned on.
Quick Reference Guide
Lifetime Points
● Comes on when the vehicle is turned off.
Lifetime Points
Fuel Economy Indicator (P90)
● Keep the sphere from being too small. The bigger the
sphere is while driving, the higher the fuel economy
becomes.
Sphere Size:
Maximum
Middle
Minimum
Fuel Economy:
Best
Better
Worse
Acceleration/
Deceleration:
Slow
Moderate
Aggressive
11
The Acura Hybrid System
Quick Reference Guide
Low speed cruise
● Only IMA motor is powering
the vehicle and IMA battery is
discharging.
Start-up/Low speed cruise/
Aggressive acceleration
● The IMA motor assists the
engine.
Vehicle
Speed
Time
Hybrid
System
IMA
Motor
Assist
IMA
Battery
Fuel Economy
Indicator
12
Tips to Improve Fuel Economy
The main power source for the Acura hybrid system is the engine. The
IMA motor assists the engine to improve fuel economy, based on current
operating conditions.
Engine
ON
Fuel
To help your vehicle’s fuel economy:
● Avoid aggressive acceleration/braking
● Monitor the fuel economy indicator displayed on
the multi-information display.
It reflects your driving style. (P11, 90)
Slow acceleration/High
speed cruise
● Only the engine powers
the vehicle.
Deceleration
● The IMA motor charges the
IMA battery.
Hybrid
System
Hybrid
System
IMA
Motor
Assist
Engine
OFF
IMA
Battery
Fuel
IMA
Motor
OFF
IMA
Battery
Hybrid
System
Stop
● Auto Idle Stop is in
operation.
Engine
ON
Charging
Engine
OFF
IMA
Battery
Fuel
Fuel
Hybrid
System
IMA
Motor
OFF
Engine
OFF
IMA
Battery
Fuel
To Keep the IMA Battery in Good Condition
Safety Precautions
Do not cover the air intake.
Do not touch the Acura hybrid system
A high voltage current runs through the Acura hybrid system. Consult your authorized
dealer when maintenance or repair is needed.
Quick Reference Guide
Drive your vehicle at least once a month, and drive for more than 30 minutes at a time. Parking your vehicle for an
extended period can cause the IMA battery to weaken or decrease the IMA battery life.
IMA Battery
Air Intake
If the air intake is obstructed during
vehicle operation, the IMA battery can
become too hot. To protect the battery,
the system may start limiting IMA battery
output power and cause the Acura hybrid
system and 12 volt battery charging system
indicators to come on.
IMA System Indicator (P77)
12 Volt Battery Charging
System Indicator (P72)
Electric Power Cable
If a crash occurs
● Be careful of electric shock hazard.
u If a crash severely damaged your vehicle, there is a possibility of electrical shock. Do
not touch the Acura hybrid system components or their wiring (orange).
● Avoid contact with IMA battery fluid.
u The battery fluid may leak as a result of a severe crash. Avoid any skin or eye
contact with the fluid. The battery fluid is corrosive. If you accidentally touch it,
flush the affected area(s) with a large quantity of water for at least five minutes,
and medical attention immediately.
● Use a fire extinguisher for an electrical fire.
u Attempting to extinguish an electrical fire with a small quantity of water can be
dangerous.
When the vehicle is disposed
● The IMA battery is a Lithium ion battery. Acura collects and recycles used IMA batteries
– consult with your dealer for proper battery disposal in the event your vehicle is not
repairable.
13
Safe Driving
(P27)
Quick Reference Guide
Airbags (P39)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P54)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P66)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P32)
Before Driving Checklist (P220)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
14
Instrument Panel
(P69)
System Indicators
Multi-Information Display
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
System Indicators
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Tachometer
Keyless Access System
Indicator
Speedometer
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Door and Trunk Open
Indicator
Fuel Gauge
Charge/Assist Gauge
Shift Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
U.S.
Security System Alarm Indicator
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
System Indicators
Canada
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
Lights Indicators
Low Temperature Indicator
ECON ECON Mode Indicator
U.S.
Quick Reference Guide
Gauges (P86)/Multi-Information Display (P87)/System Indicators (P70)
Auto Idle Stop Indicator
IMA System Indicator
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Canada
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
System Message
Indicator
15
Controls
(P103)
Quick Reference Guide
ENGINE START/STOP
Button (P124)
Press the button to change the vehicle's
power mode.
Turn Signals (P126)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Wipers and Washers
(P130)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
: Long Delay
: Short Delay
Left
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Lights (P126)
Light Control Switches
High Beam
Low Beam
Flashing
16
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Steering Wheel (P132)
Trunk (P114)
Power Windows (P120)
Trunk Release
● To unlock and open the trunk:
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P111)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it in one motion.
Power Window Lock Button
Indicator
Quick Reference Guide
● With the power mode in ON, open and
close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the
keyless access remote.
• Press the trunk release button on the
trunk lid.
Power Door Mirrors
Window Switch
(P134)
● With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
17
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System (P 146)
Clock (P 104)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
a
Models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
The climate control system is voice operable. See the Navigation System Manual for
complete details.
/
c
(Fan Control) Buttons
(ON/OFF) Button
b
Press the CLOCK (AUX) button until the
displayed time begins flashing.
Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute)
to set the time. Press Preset (6 (Reset)
to set the time to the nearest hour.
Press the CLOCK button again to set
the time.
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Models with navigation system
Passenger's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
Driver's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
AUTO Button
MODE Control Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
(Recirculation) Button
Air flows from dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
18
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
Features
● Audio Remote Controls (P 159)
VOL Button
MODE Button
(P151)
Quick Reference Guide
Audio system (P 152) For navigation system operation
() See the Navigation System Manual
Audio/
Information Screen
AM Button
FM Button *
(CD Eject) Button
*
VOL /
(Volume/Power) Knob
CD Slot
(XM®) Button *
CD Button
FM/AM Button *
AUX Button
Preset Buttons
FOLDER Bar *
SKIP Bar
A.SEL (Auto Select)
Button
CATEGORY Bar *
CH Button
● VOL (Volume) Button
Press
/
to adjust the volume up/
down.
● MODE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM1/
FM2/AM/XM1 */XM2 */CD/AUX.
● CH (Channel) Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
SCAN Button
DISPLAY Button
BACK Button
PHONE Button
SETUP Button
Selector Knob
* Not available on all models
19
Driving
(P219)
Quick Reference Guide
Continuous Variable Transmission
(CVT) (P231 )
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the
engine.
Shift Lever
● Shifting
Release Button
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode (P233)
● Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or down without
removing your hands from the steering wheel.
When the shift lever is in
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator
Selected Speed
Number
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
M Indicator
Drive
• Normal driving.
• 7-speed mode can be used temporarily.
Drive (S)
Used for:
• Better acceleration
• Increased engine braking
• Going up or down hills
• Driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode
• Driving in L mode
Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P .
Press the release button to move the
shift lever.
Move the shift lever without pressing
the release button.
20
Shift Down (Paddle Shifter
● Pulling a paddle shifter temporarily
changes the mode from continuous
variable transmission (CVT) to 7-speed
manual shift mode. The selected
speed number is displayed in the shift
indicator.
When the shift lever is in
● Pulling a paddle shifter changes the
mode from continuous variable
transmission (CVT) to 7-speed manual
shift mode. The M indicator and the
selected speed number are displayed
in the shift indicator.
Shift Up (+
L (Low) Mode (P235)
Paddle Shifter
● Use Low to get more power when
climbing steep hills.
● With the shift lever in (S , pull the (+
and (- paddle shifters at the same
time until the shift indicator display
changes to L.
VSA® OFF Button (P244)
Refueling (P254)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded premium gasoline with a pump octane
number 91 or higher recommended
Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 L)
a
Push the fuel fill door
release handle.
Cruise Control (P240)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press DECEL/SET once you
have achieved the desired speed (above
25 mph or 40 km/h).
b
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P245)
U.S. models only
● The TPMS monitors tire pressure.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
c
d
Quick Reference Guide
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
21
Maintenance
(P259)
Quick Reference Guide
Under the Hood (P268)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the 12 volt battery condition monthly.
a
b
Wiper Blades (P292)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
Locate the hood latch lever, slide the lever and lift up the
hood.
Lights (P282)
Tires (P294)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter driving.
c
22
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
● Inspect all lights regularly.
Handling the Unexpected
(P311)
Engine Won't Start (P329) Overheating (P335)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Indicators Come On
Blown Fuse (P341)
Emergency Towing (P344)
(P337)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
Quick Reference Guide
Flat Tire (P313)
● Park in a safe location and repair the flat
tire using the tire repair kit.
23
What to Do If
Quick Reference Guide
24
The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?
●
The power mode does not
change from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P .
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
LOCK position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the lever
to the UNLOCK position.
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
Move the steering wheel left and right after
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button.
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
● The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
● The exterior lights are left on.
● The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when:
● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
● The parking brake lever is not fully released.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Is it possible to use
unleaded gasoline with a
Pump Octane Number
(PON) of 87 or higher on
this vehicle?
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Number (PON) of 91 or
higher is recommended.
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic
knocking noise in the engine and will result in decreased engine
performance.
Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to
engine damage.
Quick Reference Guide
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
25
26
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 28
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 30
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 32
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 35
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 39
Types of Airbags ................................ 42
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42
Side Airbags....................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 49
Airbag System Indicators.................... 50
Airbag Care ....................................... 53
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 54
Safety of Infants and Small Children .... 56
Safety of Larger Children ................... 64
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 66
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 67
27
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
28
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
Safe Driving
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
29
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
9
8 12
h
9
Safe Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
6
10
7
8
10
11
7
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners
Occupant Position Detection
System (OPDS) Sensor
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
30
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
■ Safety Checklist
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 111
If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door
and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close all
doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 75
Safe Driving
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
1Safety Checklist
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 135
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 138
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 54
31
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The front passenger's and rear seat belts also have a lockable
retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 61
32
1About Your Seat Belts
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
■ Proper use of seat belts
1About Your Seat Belts
■ Seat Belt Reminder
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
Safe Driving
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
1Seat Belt Reminder
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the power mode is set to ON before the
driver's seat belt is fastened, a beeper will
sound and the indicator will blink. If the driver
does not fasten the belt before the beeper
stops, the indicator will remain on.
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
the power mode is set to ON.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
Continued
33
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
Safe Driving
34
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 135
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Safe Driving
Pull out slowly.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
Continued
35
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
Lap belt
as low as
possible
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Push
36
1Fastening a Seat Belt
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
■ Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
37
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Seat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
38
1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
Airbags
Airbag System Components
11 12
9
8
7 10
Safe Driving
8
10
8
6
8
8
8
Continued
39
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. The airbag
system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
d An electronic control unit that continually
monitors and can record information
about the sensors, the airbag activators,
the seat belt tensioners, and driver and
front passenger seat belt use when the
power mode is in ON.
e Automatic
front seat belt tensioners. The
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
h Impact
sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front or side impact.
i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.
j Sensors
that can detect if a child or small
statured adult is in the deployment path
of the front passenger's side airbag.
k An indicator on the instrument panel that
b Two
side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
fA
driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
l An indicator on the instrument panel that
g Weight
c Two
side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
40
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
alerts you that the front passenger's side
airbag has been turned off.
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
■ Important Facts About Your Airbags
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, and sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not
wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
41
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Types of Airbags
Safe Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.
■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
42
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is
in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ Operation
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
■ How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Continued
43
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
■ When front airbags should not deploy
Safe Driving
44
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
1Advanced Airbags
■ Advanced Airbags
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger's front airbag.
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
Make sure the floor mat behind the front passenger's
seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor. An improperly
placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag
sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 307
45
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Safe Driving
■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location
■ Operation
When
inflated
Side Airbag
46
When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
1Side Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger’s in the
passenger seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
Continued
Safe Driving
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
47
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
■ Side Airbag Cutoff System
Safe Driving
To reduce the likelihood that a front passenger may be injured by an inflating side
airbag, the passenger side airbag is automatically turned off when:
• The height sensors detect a child or short-statured adult is seated in the front
passenger seat.
• The position sensor detects that the front passenger is leaning into the
deployment path of the side airbag.
When the side airbag cutoff system is activated, the side airbag off indicator comes
on.
2 Side Airbag Off Indicator P. 52
■ Side Airbag Off Indicator
If the side airbag off indicator comes on, have the passenger sit upright. A few
seconds after the passenger is sitting properly, the side airbag will automatically be
turned on, and the indicator will go off.
If the front passenger is a child, stop when it is safe to do so, and have the child sit
properly restrained in a rear seat.
48
1Side Airbag Cutoff System
Sensor that
monitors the
passenger’s height.
Sensor that monitors the
passenger’s position.
The sensors that monitor the front passenger's height
and body position may not work if:
• The seat-back is wet
• The passenger is touching a metal or other
electrical conductive object
• A seat cushion is on the seat
• The passenger is wearing excessively thick clothing
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbags are most effective when an
occupant is wearing their seat belt properly and
sitting upright, well back in their seat.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Safe Driving
■ Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
49
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display.
Safe Driving
■ SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
■ When the power mode is set to ON
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
50
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
U.S.
Canada
■ When the passenger airbag off
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
Safe Driving
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors. Such as:
• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
2 Child Safety P. 54
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
Continued
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
51
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
1Side Airbag Off Indicator
■ Side Airbag Off Indicator
■ When the side airbag off indicator comes on
Safe Driving
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada
This indicator comes on if the passenger's side airbag has been turned off because
the passenger is too small to be sitting in the front seat, is slouching or not sitting
upright, or has leaned into the airbag's deployment path.
Unless the passenger is a smaller statured adult or a child, the indicator should go
off when the passenger returns to a proper upright sitting position.
52
When you set the power mode to ON, the indicator
should come on for a few seconds and then go out.
If it doesn't come on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the front seat, have
the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
Safe Driving
■ When the airbags have deployed
1Airbag Care
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the passenger’s weight
sensors. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact an Acura dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, Acura Client Relations
at 1-800-382-2238 and for Canadian vehicles, Canadian Acura Client Service at 1888-9-ACURA-9.
53
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
Safe Driving
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
54
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
Safe Driving
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 67
55
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants
Safe Driving
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
1Protecting Infants
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 39
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
56
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
■ Protecting Smaller Children
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Continued
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Selecting a Child Seat
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
58
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
Marks
Lower Anchors
Rigid Type
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
Continued
59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Flexible Type
Tether
Strap
Hook
Anchor
60
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
Safe Driving
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
Continued
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
62
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
■ Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Safe Driving
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.
Tether Anchorage Points
1Adding Security with a Tether
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
Anchor
Cover
Outer Position
Tether
Strap
Hook
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
Anchor
Center Position
Tether
Strap
Hook
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
Safe Driving
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
64
1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
1Booster Seats
■ Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
65
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked
vehicle with the engine running.
66
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Dashboard
Safe Driving
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
Canadian models
Doorjambs
U.S. models only
U.S. models
Canadian
models
Radiator Cap
67
68
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 70
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 81
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges.............................................. 86
Multi-Information Display .................. 87
69
Indicators
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Instrument Panel
●
U.S.
Canada
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator (Red)
●
●
●
(Red)
70
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off if the parking brake has
been released.
Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is
released.
Comes on when the brake fluid level
is low.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Explanation
●
Comes on while driving - Make sure the
parking brake is released. Check the brake
fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes
on while driving P. 339
●
Comes on along with the ABS indicator
- Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 339
Message
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
U.S.
●
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. Normal braking is not
affected.
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
Message
U.S.
Canada
Instrument Panel
Canada
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the cooperative control with
regenerative braking.
Explanation
(Amber)
●
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off either
when the engine starts or after
several seconds if the engine is not
started. If “readiness codes” have
not been set, it blinks five times
before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's
cylinders is detected.
●
Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
●
Comes on while driving - Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place
where there are no flammable objects. Stop
the engine for 10 minutes or more, and
wait for it to cool down. Then, take the
vehicle to a dealer.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 351
●
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 338
Continued
71
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Instrument Panel
12 Volt Battery
Charging System
Indicator
●
●
Shift Lever
Position Indicator
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on when the 12 volt battery is
not charging.
72
●
●
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem.
●
Comes on when the 7-speed manual
shift mode is applied.
Message
Comes on while driving - Turn off the
climate control system and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 337
Indicates the current shift lever
position.
Transmission
Indicator
M (7-speed
manual shift
mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator
Explanation
2 Shifting P. 231
●
—
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts
and acceleration and have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 233
—
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
●
Low Fuel
Indicator
●
●
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●
Comes on and the beeper sounds if
you are not wearing a seat belt when
you set the power mode to ON.
If the front passenger is not wearing
a seat belt, the indicator comes on a
few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not fastened
a seat belt. The beeper sounds and
the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.
●
Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 1.9 U.S.
gal./7.5 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
If it comes on at any other time, there
is a problem with the ABS.
●
●
Message
The beeper stops and the indicator goes off
when you and the front passenger fasten
their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat belt A detection error may have occurred in the
sensor. Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Instrument Panel
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
Explanation
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 33
●
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as
possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator on,
your vehicle still has normal braking ability
but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 250
Continued
73
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Instrument Panel
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
●
●
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator
●
●
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator
74
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system, hill start assist
system, creep aid system, or brake
assist system.
●
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
Message
2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 243
2 VSA® On and Off P. 244
—
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
●
●
●
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
Auto Idle Stop
Indicator
●
●
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●
Comes on for a few seconds if you
set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on if any door or the trunk is
not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if any door is opened while
driving.
●
Goes off when all doors and the trunk are
closed.
Comes on when you set the power
mode to ON, and goes off when the
engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the EPS system.
●
Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Blinks when Auto Idle Stop is in
operation. The engine automatically
shuts off.
Message
Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 337
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 339
2 Auto Idle Stop P. 236
—
Continued
75
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
Instrument Panel
U.S.
models
only
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
●
●
●
System Message
Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON.
Comes on if the tire pressure of any
of the tires becomes significantly
low.
Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS or when a compact
spare tire is temporarily installed.
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system
message on the multi-information
display appears at the same time.
Explanation
●
●
Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
Blinks and remains on - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator Comes On or Blinks P. 340
●
●
●
76
Message
While the indicator is on, press the
(information) button to see the message
again.
Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears on
the multi-information display. Take the
appropriate action for the message.
The multi-information display does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the
button
is pressed.
—
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
IMA System
Indicator
●
High-Beam
Indicator
●
●
●
Lights On
Indicator
Fog Light
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the hybrid system.
●
Blink when you operate the turn
signal lever.
Blink along with all turn signals if you
press the hazard warning button.
●
Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
Remains on or does not come on at all Avoid high speed driving and have the
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
2 If the IMA Indicator Comes On P. 340
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn
signal light bulb has blown. Change the
bulb immediately.
—
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 286, 288
Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.
Comes on whenever the light switch
is on, or in AUTO when the exterior
lights are on.
Message
●
—
—
If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY
or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the exterior
lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver's door is opened.
—
—
—
Continued
Instrument Panel
●
Turn Signal
Indicators
Explanation
77
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
U.S.
●
Instrument Panel
Canada
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when the passenger side
airbag system is automatically shut
off.
Explanation
●
●
●
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
●
Comes on briefly when you set the
power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
●
●
●
78
U.S.
Canada
●
Immobilizer
System Indicator
It does not mean there is a problem with
your side airbags.
Comes on when nobody is sitting in the
passenger seat - Have the vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Comes on when someone is sitting in
the seat - Have the passenger sit properly.
Message
Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
then select the ON mode again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.
—
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Explanation
Blinks when the Security System
Alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 118
Message
—
Indicator
●
Keyless Access
System Indicator
●
Low Temperature
Indicator
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the keyless access system
or keyless starting system.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Comes on when the engine coolant
temperature is low.
●
If the indicator stays on after the engine has
reached normal operating temperature,
there may be a problem with the
temperature sensors. Have the vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Instrument Panel
●
—
Continued
79
uuIndicatorsu
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
ECON Mode
Indicator
Instrument Panel
80
●
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
●
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON, then
goes off.
Comes on when the ECON mode is
on.
Explanation
Message
2 ECON Button P. 239
Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button.
2 Cruise Control P. 240
—
Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control.
2 Cruise Control P. 240
—
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the
with the system message indicator on.
Message
(information) button to see the message again
Condition
●
Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed.
Instrument Panel
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 338
Canadian models
●
Appears when the washer fluid is low.
●
Refill washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 281
●
●
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon.
Consequently, SERVICE DUE NOW and SERVICE PAST
DUE follow.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 263
Continued
81
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Instrument Panel
●
Appears when the IMA battery is significantly low.
●
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
Explanation
●
Drive continuously or, if necessary, allow the vehicle to
idle in an open area until the message disappears.
2 Overheating P. 335
●
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
high.
●
Drive slowly to prevent overheating.
●
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on the
battery.
Appears when the 12 volt battery is not charging.
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears along with the 12 volt battery charging
system indicator - Turn off the climate control system
and rear defogger to reduce electricity consumption.
●
2 Checking the 12 Volt Battery P. 303
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 337
82
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
U.S.
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the starter system has a problem.
●
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 15 seconds while pressing the
brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Instrument Panel
●
Canada
—
Continued
83
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
●
Instrument Panel
●
●
Explanation
Appears when you close the door with the power mode
in ON without the keyless access remote inside the
vehicle.
●
Appears when the keyless access remote battery
becomes weak.
●
Disappears when you bring the keyless remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.
2 Keyless Access Remote Reminder P. 125
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 304
Appears three seconds after the TO START ENGINE
message appears.
2 Starting the Engine P. 226
●
Appears after you unlock and open the driver’s door.
2 Starting the Engine P. 226
84
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages
Message
Condition
Explanation
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
●
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button
to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .
●
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P .
●
Appears if the keyless access remote battery is too weak
to start the engine or the key is not within operating
range to start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.
Instrument Panel
●
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 330
85
Gauges and Multi-Information Display
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Instrument Panel
■ Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
■ Charge/Assist Gauge
■ IMA Motor Assist (ASST)
The degree to which the IMA motor is assisting the engine is displayed by the needle
on the ASST side.
■ Battery Charge in Progress (CHRG)
The degree to which the IMA battery is being charged is displayed by the needle on
the CHRG side.
The remaining battery charge level is displayed on the multi-information display.
2 IMA Battery Charge Level Indicator/Power Flow Monitor P. 93
86
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the needle approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Multi-Information Display
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature
indicator, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings
and other helpful information.
■ Switching the Display
(information) button or the SEL/RESET button to change the
Continued
Instrument Panel
Press the
display.
87
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Instrument Panel
Fuel Economy
Indicator
Average Fuel Economy/
Instant Fuel Economy
Range
Button
SEL/RESET
Button
Elapsed Time A
OFF
Customize Settings
88
Average Fuel
Economy Records
Engine Oil Life
Power Flow Monitor
Average Speed A
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
SEL/RESET Button
Odometer
Instrument Panel
SEL/RESET
Button
SEL/RESET
Button
Trip A
Trip B
Outside temperature
■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.
■ Trip Meter
1Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip
meter is reset to 0.0.
Continued
89
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Outside Temperature
1Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Instrument Panel
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
■ Fuel Economy Indicator
The fuel economy indicator changes its size while driving. The indicator shrinks with
aggressive acceleration and deceleration, and grows back bigger again as fuel
economy gets better, and the halo appears around it when driving in the most fuel
efficient style.
Keep the indicator size as big as possible.
Sphere Size:
90
Maximum
Middle
Minimum
Fuel Economy:
Best
Better
Worse
Acceleration/
Deceleration:
Slow
Moderate
Aggressive
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 95
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Average Fuel Economy Records
Latest Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy for the last
three driving cycles (1-3), and the current
driving cycle (0) in mpg or l/100 km.
Instrument Panel
Each time you set the power mode to ON, the
display is updated, and the oldest record is
deleted.
Past Average Fuel Economy
■ Average Fuel Economy
1Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy is reset.
2 Customized Features P. 95
■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.
■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.
1Elapsed Time
■ Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Continued
91
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Instrument Panel
92
1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ IMA Battery Charge Level Indicator/Power Flow Monitor
Displays engine and IMA motor power flow and whether the system is assisting the
engine or charging the battery.
Power Flow
Engine Operation Icon
The IMA battery charge level may decrease rapidly
under the following conditions:
• When the 12 volt battery has been replaced.
• When the IMA battery has been disconnected.
• When the IMA battery control system corrects its
reading.
The charge level reading will be corrected
automatically while driving.
Not operating
IMA battery icon
shows charge level.
Power is supplied by the
engine and the IMA motor is
assisting the engine.
Power is supplied by
only the IMA motor.
The IMA motor is
charging the IMA
battery.
Power is only supplied
by the engine and the
IMA motor is charging
the IMA battery.
Power is only supplied
by the engine.
If the IMA battery becomes too hot or too cold, the
battery stops outputting to protect itself from
damages. This disables the hybrid system assist and
Auto Idle Stop, even though the battery is
wellcharged.
Instrument Panel
Operating
1IMA Battery Charge Level Indicator/Power Flow Monitor
It takes a short time to normalize the IMA battery’s
output power depending on the weather.
Continued
93
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 263
Instrument Panel
94
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
1Customized Features
■ Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 97
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
■ How to customize
button to select CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS while the power mode
Multi-Information
Display:
Goes to customize
settings.
When you customize settings:
Shift to (P
Instrument Panel
Press the
is in ON.
Button:
Changes the customize
menus and items
SEL/RESET Button:
Enters the selected item
Continued
95
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Customization flow
Press the
RESET button.
button to select CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS and press the SEL/
CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS
SEL/RESET
Instrument Panel
METER SETUP
SEL/RESET
LANGUAGE SELECTION
ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY
“TRIP A” RESET TIMING
“TRIP B” RESET TIMING
KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS
KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP
SEL/RESET
DOOR UNLOCK MODE
KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH
KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP
LIGHTING SETUP
SEL/RESET
INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER
AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY
96
DOOR SETUP
SEL/RESET
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
DOOR LOCK MODE
KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT
SECURITY RELOCK TIMER
MAINTENANCE INFO.
SEL/RESET
RESET/CANCEL
DEFAULT ALL
SEL/RESET
CANCEL/SET
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ List of customizable options
Customizable
Features
Setup Group
LANGUAGE
SELECTION
Description
Changes the displayed language.
Selectable settings
ENGLISH*1/FRENCH/
SPANISH
METER
SETUP
KEYLESS
ACCESS
SETUP
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
“TRIP A” RESET
TIMING
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average
fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.
WITH REFUEL/IGN OFF/
MANUALLY RESET*1
“TRIP B” RESET
TIMING
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average
fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B.
WITH REFUEL/IGN OFF/
MANUALLY RESET*1
KEYLESS START
GUIDANCE SCREENS
Changes the display of the keyless start guidance screens.
ON*1/OFF
DOOR UNLOCK
MODE
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s
door handle.
DRIVER DOOR ONLY*1/ALL
DOORS
KEYLESS ACCESS
LIGHT FLASH
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock
the doors.
ON*1/OFF
KEYLESS ACCESS
BEEP
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.
ON*1/OFF
Instrument Panel
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.)
ADJUST OUTSIDE
TEMP. DISPLAY
*1: Default Setting
Continued
97
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Setup
Group
Instrument Panel
LIGHTING
SETUP
DOOR
SETUP
Customizable Features
Selectable settings
INTERIOR LIGHT
DIMMING TIME
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec*1/15sec
HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF
TIMER
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.
60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
AUTO LIGHT
SENSITIVITY
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
MAX/HIGH/MID*1/LOW/MIN
AUTO DOOR LOCK
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.
WITH VEH SPD*1/SHIFT FROM (P /
OFF
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.
DRIVER DOOR with SHIFT to (P *1/
ALL DOORS with SHIFT to (P /
DRIVER DOOR with IGN OFF/ALL
DOORS with IGN OFF/OFF
DOOR LOCK MODE
Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or Built-in key.
DRIVER DOOR*1/ALL DOORS
KEYLESS LOCK
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
LOCK/UNLOCK - The exterior lights flash
LOCK (2nd push) - The beeper sounds
ON*1/OFF
SECURITY RELOCK
TIMER
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
*1:Default Setting
98
Description
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable settings
MAINTENANCE INFO.
Resets the Maintenance MinderTM.
RESET/CANCEL
DEFAULT ALL
Sets/Cancels all the customized settings as default.
CANCEL/SET
Instrument Panel
Continued
99
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
■ Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “TRIP A” RESET TIMING setting to ON are shown
below. The default setting for “TRIP A” RESET TIMING is MANUALLY RESET.
1. Press and release the
button
until CUSTOMIZE SETTINGS appears on
the display.
Instrument Panel
2. Press the SEL/RESET button to go into the
METER SETUP group.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button again.
u LANGUAGE SELECTION appears first
on the display.
4. Press the
button until “TRIP A”
RESET TIMING appears on the display,
then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the SETUP
screen, where you can select WITH
REFUEL, IGN OFF, MANUALLY
RESET, or EXIT.
100
uuGauges and Multi-Information DisplayuMulti-Information Display
5. Press the
button and select
MANUALLY RESET, then press the SEL/
RESET button.
u The MANUALLY RESET setup screen
appears, then the display returns to the
customize item screen.
Instrument Panel
6. Press the
button until EXIT
appears on the display, then press the
SEL/RESET button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
101
102
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Setting the Clock .............................. 104
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 105
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal
Strength......................................... 106
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 107
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 111
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 112
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 113
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 114
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 118
Security System Alarm...................... 118
Opening and Closing the Windows .... 120
Opening and Closing the Moonroof ... 123
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 124
Turn Signals ..................................... 126
Light Switches.................................. 126
Fog Lights ........................................ 129
Daytime Running Lights ................... 129
Wipers and Washers ........................ 130
Brightness Control ........................... 131
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button...132
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 132
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 133
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 134
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions............. 135
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items
Interior Lights .................................. 141
Interior Convenience Items .............. 142
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 146
Synchronized Mode..............................148
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ......149
103
Setting the Clock
Clock
1Clock
Models without navigation system
Controls
104
You can adjust the time in the clock display, with the power mode in ON.
1. Press the SETUP button.
SETUP Button
2. Rotate
to select Adjust Clock on the
screen.
3. Press . Adjust Clock appears.
4. Rotate
to select the item you want to
adjust (12/24 hour mode, hour, minute).
Then press .
5. Rotate
to make the adjustment.
6. Press
to enter your selection. The display
returns to Adjust Clock. Repeat steps 4 to
6 to adjust other items.
7. To enter the selection, rotate
and select
Set, then press .
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
Models with navigation system
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
1Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 118
■ Keys
■ Keyless access remote
Use the keyless access remote to start and
stop the engine, to lock and unlock the doors
and to open the trunk.
Built-in Key
Release Button
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the keyless access remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
Controls
There is a PANIC button in the remote
transmitter.
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the keyless access system may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
pressing the release button. To reinstall the
built-in key, push the built-in key into the
keyless access remote until it clicks.
Continued
105
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
■ Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
Controls
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the keyless access remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the keyless access remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the keyless access remote.
106
1Low Keyless Access Remote Signal Strength
Communication between the keyless access remote
and the vehicle consumes the keyless access remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is depleted whenever the keyless access
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Remote Transmitter
■ Locking the doors
LED
Unlock
Button
Lock
Button
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the UNLOCK button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the
driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
u The remaining doors unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 95
Controls
Press the LOCK button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or keyless access system only when the
power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the UNLOCK button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 141
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
Continued
107
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Keyless Access System
Controls
When you carry the keyless access remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors and open the
trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 304
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 95
• Do not leave the keyless access remote in the
vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
■ Locking the vehicle
Door Lock Button
108
1Using the Keyless Access System
• Even if you are not carrying the keyless access
Press the door lock button on the front door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors lock; and the
security system sets.
remote, you can lock/unlock the doors while
someone else with the remote is within range.
• The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the keyless access remote is within range.
• If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
• The door may not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Unlocking the vehicle
1Using the Keyless Access System
Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
u The beeper will sound.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button P. 115
Continued
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the
keyless access remote if it is above or below the
outside handle.
• The keyless access remote may not operate if it is
too close to the door and door glass.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized using the multi-information display.
2 Customized Features P. 95
Controls
Trunk Release Button
• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
109
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock
When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 95
Unlock
Controls
■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
■ Locking the front doors
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■ Locking the rear doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the keyless access remote is inside the vehicle, and
any door is open.
110
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors
lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
1Using the Lock Tab
■ Using the Lock Tab
Lock Tab
To Lock
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■ Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
To Unlock
Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Controls
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
■ Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
The inner front door handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 112
Inner Handle
Continued
111
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors.
To Lock
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either front door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors lock/
unlock at the same time.
To Unlock
Controls
Master Door Lock Switch
Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■ When opening the door
Unlock
Lock
112
Open the door using the outside door handle.
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks all doors and unlocks the driver’s door automatically when a
certain condition is met.
■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information
display.
2 Customized Features P. 95
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Auto Door Unlocking
The driver’s door unlocks when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal
depressed.
Controls
■ Park unlock mode
113
Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 66
Controls
Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk Release
114
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button
■ Locking the trunk opener
You can lock the trunk release with the builtin key.
Trunk Release Button
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the keyless access remote.
u The beeper will sound.
1Using the Trunk Release Button
• Do not leave the keyless access remote in the
Controls
Using the Trunk Release Button
vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you.
• A person who is not carrying the keyless access
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
• Do not leave the keyless access remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
115
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
Trunk
Button
Controls
Trunk Main Switch
ON
OFF
Main Switch
116
1Trunk Main Switch
The trunk main switch disables the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter and
the trunk release button on the trunk lid to
protect luggage in the trunk.
1. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
2. Lock the glove box.
3. Lock the trunk release.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 114
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
the built-in key from the keyless access remote by
pressing the release button, and give the remote as a
valet key.
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
Emergency Trunk Opener
Lever
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
Controls
117
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Controls
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system with the keyless
access remote.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood, or doors are opened
without the key, remote transmitter, or keyless access system.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access remote. The
system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
118
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the keyless access remote in the vehicle can
result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• All doors are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter or keyless
access system.
■ When the security system alarm sets
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key or remote
transmitter, or you grab either front door handle while carrying the keyless access
remote. The security system indicator goes off at the same time.
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter,
or keyless access system.
Controls
The security system indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking
interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
1Security System Alarm
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
■ Panic Mode
PANIC
Button
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or set the power mode to ON.
119
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON,
using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to open and
close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver's seat.
Controls
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when
children are in the vehicle.
■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
ON
OFF
Power Window
Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
Indicator
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
120
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
Close
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
Open
Controls
■ Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote
To open: Press the UNLOCK button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down for the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
Unlock
Button
Continued
121
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
■ Opening/Closing the Windows/Moonroof with the Key
Close
Open
Controls
122
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
Open
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
Tilt
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Controls
Close
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes.
123
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
■ Changing the Power Mode
Indicator
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked. The
power to all electrical
components is turned off.
Controls
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be
used.
Without pressing
the brake pedal
Press the button without the shift
lever in (P .
Shift to (P then press the button.
124
Press the button.
Operating Range
You can start the engine when the keyless access
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the keyless access remote
is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the keyless access remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR
START BUTTON message appears on the multiinformation display.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak P. 330
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
■ Keyless Access Remote Reminder
■ When the power mode is in ON
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the multi-information display notifies the
driver inside that the remote is out.
■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY or in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
1Keyless Access Remote Reminder
When the keyless access remote is within the
system’s operational range, and the driver’s door is
closed, the warning function cancels.
If the keyless access remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Controls
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
keyless access remote is out of the vehicle. If
the buzzer continues even after the remote is
put back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.
Removing the keyless access remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the keyless access remote on the
dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the
warning buzzer to go off. Under some other
conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating
the remote, the warning buzzer may also go off even
if the remote is within the system’s operational
range.
125
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Turn Signals
Right Turn
The turn signals can be used when the power
mode is in ON.
■ One-touch turn signal
Left Turn
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
Controls
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Light Switches
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on side marker, tail, and
rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
126
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
with the lights on, a light on reminder chime will
sound when you open the driver’s door.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 77
■ Manual Operation
High Beams
1Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode
setting.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Models with high voltage discharge tube bulb
Repeatedly turning the headlights on and off reduces
the life of the HID headlight bulbs.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
Your vehicle is equipped with the automatic
headlight adjusting system that automatically adjusts
the vertical angle of the low beam headlights. If you
find a significant change in the vertical angle of the
headlights, there may be a problem with the system.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
1Automatic Lighting Control
■ Automatic Lighting Control
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the power mode is in ON.
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Controls
Light Sensor
You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
2 Customized Features P. 95
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Bright
Dark
2 Customized Features P. 95
Continued
127
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
■ Headlight Integration with Wiper *
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
1Headlight Integration with Wiper *
This feature activates during the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
When the ambient light is at dark, the automatic
lighting control feature overrides, and the headlights
come on with or without the wipers sweeping more
than several times.
Controls
■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with
you, and close the driver’s door even if you leave the light switch on or in AUTO.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but
do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the
switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
128
* Not available on all models
1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 95
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights
Fog Lights
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
1Fog Lights
The fog lights go off when the headlights turn off, or
when the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator P. 77
Fog Light Switch
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
• The power mode is in ON.
• The headlight switch is off, or in
.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF turns off the daytime running lights.
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.
129
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the power mode is in ON.
■ MIST
Pull to
use
washer.
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
Controls
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
MIST
■ Adjusting the delay
OFF
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
Long delay
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Short delay
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
130
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
1Wipers and Washers
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle starts moving, the wipers make a
single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal
within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to
normal.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Brightness Control
When the power mode is in ON, you can use
the brightness control knob to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
Control Knob
If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power
mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then
remove the obstacle.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Controls
You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The multiinformation display will return to its original
state several seconds after you adjust the
brightness.
■ Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the multiinformation display while you are adjusting it.
1Wipers and Washers
When it is bright outside and the headlight
integration with the wiper is activated, the
instrument panel brightness does not change.
Pressing the SEL/RESET button or either
(information) button switches the display between
the brightness level and other available information.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
131
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door
mirror button to defog the rear window and
mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
To adjust
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
To lock
Lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
132
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the 12 volt
battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab
Up
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 135
Controls
Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position
■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror always reduces the
glare from headlights behind you.
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .
Sensor
Indicator
* Not available on all models
133
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
power mode is in ON.
■ Mirror position adjustment
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Controls
■ Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Outer Segment
Inner Segment
134
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Adjusting the Seats
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient
space.
Move back.
■ Adjusting the front power seat *
1Adjusting the Seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Controls
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Height Adjustment
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Driver side only
* Not available on all models
Continued
135
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s)
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
Controls
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
136
Driver’s seat is shown.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
Continued
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back. Doing so may interfere with
proper seat belt or airbag operation.
Controls
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
3 WARNING
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
137
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
Controls
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
■ Adjusting the front and rear outer head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
138
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Controls
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
Continued
139
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Controls
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Armrest
■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
140
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
1Interior Light Switches
■ Interior Light Switches
Front
Door Activated Position
Off
On
On
Off
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver's door.
• The lights also come on when the power
mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
Door Activated Position
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver's door but do not open
it.
• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 95
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver's door.
• When you set the power mode to ON.
Controls
Rear
■ ON
If you leave any of the doors open, the interior lights
go off after about 15 minutes.
■ Map Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the
(map light) button.
1Map Lights
When the interior light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, pressing the
button does not turn off the map light.
141
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Interior Convenience Items
1Glove Box
■ Glove Box
Pull the handle to open the glove box. You
can lock the glove box with the built-in key.
To Lock
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Controls
Glove Box
■ Console Compartment
Press the button to open the console
compartment.
Button
142
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
1Beverage Holders
■ Beverage Holders
NOTICE
■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
Continued
Controls
■ Rear seat beverage holders
143
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
1Accessory Power Socket
■ Accessory Power Socket
The accessory power sockets can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY
or ON.
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
NOTICE
Controls
Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for
more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket
and compressor can overheat and become
permanently damaged.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts or less (15 amps).
■ Coat Hook
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
144
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
1Seat Heaters *
■ Seat Heaters *
The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the passenger's seatback due to the side airbag cutoff system.
* Not available on all models
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Controls
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
u The appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.
3 WARNING
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
145
Climate Control System
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
/
(Fan Control) Buttons
Passenger's Side
Temperature
Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button
Controls
Driver’s Side Temperature
Control Dial
AUTO Button
Floor and
defroster
vents
SYNC
(Synchronized) Button
(Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Floor vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Dashboard
vents
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side control
dial.
3. Press the
(ON/OFF) button to cancel.
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the
(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
146
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that were pressed will be
controlled automatically.
During the Auto Idle Stop, the air conditioning
system will be turned off.
If the ECON mode is selected, the fan may also be
turned off.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on AUTO, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
(windshield defroster) button
turns the air conditioner system on and
automatically switches the system to fresh air
mode.
Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
1. Press the
2. Press the
button.
button.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
While in the ECON mode, the climate control system
has greater temperature fluctuations.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
Controls
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
147
uuClimate Control SystemuSynchronized Mode
Synchronized Mode
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the
button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
Controls
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
148
uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Controls
Sensor
149
150
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 152
USB Adapter Cable .......................... 153
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 153
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 154
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 155
Audio/Information Screen ................ 156
Audio Remote Controls.................... 159
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 160
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 161
Playing XM® Radio * ......................... 163
Playing a CD .................................... 165
Playing an iPod ................................ 168
* Not available on all models
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 171
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 173
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 176
Wallpaper Setup .............................. 178
Audio Error Messages *
CD Player......................................... 180
iPod/USB Flash Drive ........................ 181
Pandora® ......................................... 182
General Information on the Audio
System
XM® Radio Service * ......................... 183
Recommended CDs ......................... 184
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash
Drives ................................................186
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * ......187
Training HomeLink........................... 187
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Using HFL ........................................ 189
HFL Menus ...................................... 191
151
Audio System
About Your Audio System
1About Your Audio System
Models with navigation system
See the Navigation System Manual for operation of the audio system, AcuraLink *,
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, and voice commands for these features.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service. It can also play
audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth®
devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, or
the remote controls on the steering wheel.
XM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
Features
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod
Remote Control
152
XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.
For more information on XM® Radio, contact a
dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 183
* Not available on all models
USB Flash
Drive
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may limit the circumstances in
which you can launch or control your attached audio
device.
uuAudio SystemuUSB Adapter Cable
USB Adapter Cable
1. Unclip the USB connector and loosen the
adapter cable.
2. Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB connector.
1USB Adapter Cable
• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
•
•
•
•
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
•
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
Features
Auxiliary Input Jack
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
Do not use an extension cable with the USB
adapter cable.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend your data backed up before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
To switch the mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to the AUX mode by
pressing the AUX button.
153
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
■ Reactivating the audio system
Features
154
1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system.
u You will be requested to enter the audio security code. See step 3.
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, ENTER CODE appears on the audio/
information screen.
3. Enter the audio security code using the preset buttons. If you enter an incorrect
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter the code
correctly after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit
a dealer to have the system reset.
1Audio System Theft Protection
Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and
security code from a dealer.
U.S. models
You can register the security code at Acura Owners
(owners.acura.com.), and find information on how to
retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.acura.com.
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob or SETUP button to
BACK Button
SETUP Button
access some audio functions.
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Press
to select.
to enter.
Press the MODE, (+ , (- ,
or
button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 159
Button
Selector Knob
Menu Display
Setup Menu Items
2 RDS Information P. 162
2 Sound Settings P. 160
2 Play Mode P. 167, 170, 175
2 Resume/Pause P. 177
2 Adjust Clock P. 104
Features
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press
to set
your selection.
SETUP button: Press to select any mode such
as the RDS Information, Sound Settings,
Play Mode, Resume/Pause, or Adjust
Clock.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness. The brightness
can be set differently for the day time and
night time.
Pressing the button switches the modes
between daytime and night time.
Adjust the brightness using
.
155
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Audio/Information Screen
Displays audio status and wallpaper, and allows you to go to various setup options.
■ Switching the Display
Press DISPLAY button. Rotate
modes.
Press .
and select the mode from the three display
Features
DISPLAY
Button
Selector Knob
156
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Audio Display
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 155
■ Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 178
■ Minimum Display
Minimizes the display by only showing the clock and audio status on the display.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
and select the setup option you
want to change. Press .
Continued
Features
■ Setting Options
157
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
■ Language Selection
1. Rotate
to select Language Selection,
then press .
2. Rotate
to select the language, then
press .
Features
158
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio Remote Controls
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
MODE Button
VOL Button
MODE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM1 FM2 AM XM1* XM2* CD AUX
1Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
When in AUX mode, the following are operable from
the remote controls:
• iPod/USB flash drive connected to the USB adapter
cable
• Bluetooth® Audio (with some phones only)
CH Button
* Not available on all models
Features
VOL (Volume) Button
Press : To increase the volume.
Press : To decrease the volume.
CH (Channel) Button
• When listening to the radio
Press (+ : To select the next preset radio station.
Press (- : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold (+ : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold (- : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press (+ : To skip to the next song.
Press (- : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD, USB flash drive
Press and hold (+ : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold (- : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press (+ : To skip to the next song.
159
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Adjusting the Sound
SETUP Button
Press the SETUP button, and rotate
to
select Sound Settings, then press . Rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
Selector Knob
Bass
Features
Treble
Fader
Balance
Subwoofer *
Speed-sensitive Volume
Compensation
Treble is selectable.
160
* Not available on all models
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio
FOLDER Bar *
Press either side to display and select an
RDS category.
SKIP Bar
Press to search up and down the selected
band for a station with a strong signal.
FM/AM Button *
Press to select a band.
CATEGORY Bar *
Press either side to display
and select an RDS category.
SCAN Button
Press to sample each of the strongest stations
on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, press the button again.
* Not available on all models
Features
AM Button *
FM Button *
Press to select a band.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until
you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band,
then press the preset button.
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
A.SEL (Auto Select) Button
Press to scan both bands and store the
strongest station in each preset. To turn
off auto select, press the button again. This
restores the presets you originally set.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Continued
161
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
■ Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ RDS Information
1. Press the SETUP button and rotate
to
select RDS Information.
2. Each time you press , the RDS
Information switches between on and off.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the MODE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 159
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store 6 stations each.
Features
Auto Select function scans and stores up to 6 AM
stations and 12 FM stations with a strong signal into
the preset button memory.
■ To find an RDS station from your selected program category
RDS Category
162
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
1. Press the FOLDER bar or the CATEGORY
bar to display and select an RDS category.
2. Use SKIP or SCAN to select an RDS station.
If you do not like the stations auto select has stored,
you can manually store your preferred frequencies.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *
Playing XM® Radio *
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
CATEGORY Bar
Press either side to display and select an XM®
Radio category.
SKIP Bar
Press to skip to the previous or next
channel.
SCAN Button
Press to sample all channels (in the channel mode),
or channels within a category (in the category
mode). Each sampling continues for a few seconds.
Press SCAN again to cancel scanning and continue
listening to the channel.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
* Not available on all models
Features
(XM®) Button
Press to select XM® Radio.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store the channel:
1. Tune to the channel.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until
you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored channel, select XM,
then press the preset button.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select channels.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Continued
163
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio *
1Playing XM® Radio *
■ To Play the XM® Radio
1. Press the
button to select the XM® radio band (XM1 or XM2).
2. Press the SETUP button, rotate
to select XM Mode, and press . Rotate
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press .
3. Select a channel using the TUNE ( ), SKIP, CATEGORY, SCAN, or Preset
buttons.
■ To Select a Channel from a List
Features
1. Press
to display a channel list.
2. Rotate
to select a channel, then press
.
164
* Not available on all models
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
You can store 12 XM® stations in the preset buttons.
XM1 and XM2 let you store 6 stations each.
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA or
AAC format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
CATEGORY Bar *
Press (+ to skip to the next
folder, and (- to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder in MP3, WMA or AAC.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second sampling of each song.
● Press to sample all tracks on the CD (all files in
the current folder in MP3, WMA or AAC).
● Press and hold to sample the first file in each of
the main folders (MP3, WMA or AAC).
● To turn off scan, press the button.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
* Not available on all models
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
Features
FOLDER Bar *
Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (to skip to the beginning of the previous
folder in MP3, WMA or AAC.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
SKIP Bar
Press
or
to change tracks (files in
MP3, WMA or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly within a
track/file
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/files. Turn to select
an item, then press to set your selection.
Continued
165
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
1. Press
to switch the display to a folder list.
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Features
Folder Selection
2. Rotate
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Track Selection
166
to select a folder.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
1How to Select a Play Mode
■ How to Select a Play Mode
Press the BACK button to go back to the previous
display, and press the SETUP button to cancel this
setting mode.
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file(s).
Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all
files in the current folder.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random order.
2. Rotate
.
3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
to select a mode, then press
Features
Play Mode
Items
.
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Normal Play, then press .
167
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB adapter cable, then press
the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 153
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
Album Art
Features
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
SKIP Bar
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a
song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs. Turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
168
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
1Playing an iPod
■ How to Select a File from the iPod Menu
1. Press
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
to display the iPod menu.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 181
2. Rotate
Features
iPod Menu
to select a menu.
3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
Continued
169
uuAudio System Basic Operationu
1How to Select a Play Mode
■ How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat Off: Turns off the repeat mode.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Off: Turns off the shuffle mode.
Shuffle: Plays all available files in a selected list
(playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or
composers) in random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
Features
Play Mode
Items
2. Rotate
.
3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
to select a mode, then press
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Normal Play, then press .
170
.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
U.S. models
iPhone® use only
Playing Internet Radio
Activate Pandora®, and connect the iPhone® using your dock connector to the USB
adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 153
Rating Icon
Album Art
Features
FOLDER Bar *
Press (+ to the next station. Press (- to the
previous station.
CATEGORY Bar
Press (+ to the next station. Press
(- to the previous station.
*
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Selector Knob
Press to enter PANDORA MENU.
Press and turn to select an item, then press to set
your selection.
* Not available on all models
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
AUX Button
Press to select iPhone® (if connected when
the Pandora® application is activated).
SKIP Bar
Press
to skip a song.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Continued
171
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
1Playing Internet Radio
■ Pandora® Menu
You can operate some of the Pandora menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Station List (QuickMix is also available)
• Like
• Dislike
• Resume/Pause
• SKIP
• Bookmark This Song
• Bookmark This Artist
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your iPhone®. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Features
■ Operating a menu item
1. Press
to display the PANDORA MENU.
2. Rotate
to select a menu.
3. Press
to display the items on that menu.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 182
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.
172
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB adapter cable, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 153
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
CATEGORY Bar *
Press (+ to skip to the next
folder, and (- to skip to the
beginning of the previous
folder.
SCAN Button
You will get a 10-second sampling of each file.
● Press to sample all files in the current folder.
● Press and hold to sample the first file in each of
the main folders.
● To turn off scan, press the button.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Features
FOLDER Bar *
Press (+ to skip to the next folder, and (to skip to the beginning of the previous
folder.
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
SKIP Bar
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a
file.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu items.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select a file, then press
to set your selection.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
* Not available on all models
Continued
173
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press
to switch the display to a folder list.
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 183
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
Features
Folder Selection
Track Selection
174
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 181
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
1How to Select a Play Mode
■ How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Normal Play
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
.
3. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
to select a mode, then press
Features
Play Mode
Items
.
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Normal Play, then press .
175
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and linked to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 196
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to
HFL.
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Features
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
VOL/
(Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
AUX Button
Press to Bluetooth®
Audio.
Preset 1 Button
Press to switch the mode
between pause and
resume.
SKIP Bar
Press
or
change files.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
SETUP Button
Press to display menu
items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Turn to select an item, then press to
set your selection.
Press to display the device’s name.
176
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
to
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
linked to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may be already linked.
1. Press the SETUP button.
2. Rotate
to select Resume/Pause, then press .
Each time you press , the setting switches between Pause and Resume.
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
Features
■ To pause or resume a file
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
177
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWallpaper Setup
Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
1Wallpaper Setup
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
■ Import Wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the adapter
cable.
•
•
•
2 USB Adapter Cable P. 153
Features
2. Press the SETUP button.
3. Rotate
to select Display Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select Import, then press .
6. Rotate
to select a desired picture, then
press .
u The preview of the imported data is
displayed.
7. Press
to save the data.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the import
wallpaper list.
8. Rotate
to select the place to save the
data, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
178
•
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
Each image file can be up to 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 x 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, No
compatible images were found. See Owner's
Manual. will appear.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuWallpaper Setup
■ Select Wallpaper
1. Rotate
to select Select on the wallpaper setup menu, then press
u The screen will change to the wallpaper list.
2. Rotate
to select desired wallpaper and press .
u When the scroll is stopped, the thumbnail is displayed.
.
■ Delete wallpaper
.
Features
1. Rotate
to select Delete on the wallpaper setup menu, then press
u The screen will change to the delete wallpaper list.
2. Rotate
to select wallpaper that you want to delete and press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to delete completely.
179
Audio Error Messages *
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message
Unplayable File
Cause
Track/file format not supported
Bad Disc
Please check owners manual
Mechanical error
Push Eject
Solution
●
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
●
Press the
(eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
●
Mecha Error
2 Protecting CDs P. 185
●
Features
Bad Disc
Servo error
Please check owners manual
Check Disc
180
* Not available on all models
Disc error
●
●
●
If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 185
uuAudio Error Messages * uiPod/USB Flash Drive
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
Bad USB Device
Please Check Owners
Manual.
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No Song
Appears when the iPod is empty. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported Ver
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected,
update the iPod software to the newer version.
Retry Connection
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive. Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
Continued
Features
USB Error
181
uuAudio Error Messages * uPandora®
U.S. models
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Features
182
Solution
PANDORA No Station
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station.
PANDORA Requires Update
Appears when Pandora version is not supported. Please update the device application.
PANDORA Unavailable
Appears when Pandora is performing system maintenance. Try again later.
PANDORA Cannot Connect
Appears when Pandora is unable to play music. Check your device.
PANDORA Loading...
Appears when Pandora is loading.
General Information on the Audio System
XM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to XM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the selector knob until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®
website to subscribe.
■ Receiving XM® Radio
Press the
(XM®) button and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Loading...:
XM® is loading the audio or program information.
Channel Off Air:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Channel Not Authorized:
XM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
--------:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
Check Antenna:
There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
* Not available on all models
Contact Information for XM® Radio:
US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1-800-8529696
Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or 1-877209-0079
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack
Features
■ XM® Radio Display Messages
1Subscribing to XM® Radio
183
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
Recommended CDs
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
■ CDs with MP3, WMA or AAC files
Features
184
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
●
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs
Warped
Features
●
With Label/
Sticker
Burrs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
185
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80/160GB (launched in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launched in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launched in 2009)
iPod nano (launched in 2010)
iPod touch (launched in 2010)
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4
Features
186
■ USB Flash Drives
•
•
•
•
•
Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
■ Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
Features
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s
path.
Training HomeLink
Red Indicator
* Not available on all models
If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
Continued
187
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink
1Training HomeLink
■ Training a Button
1.
Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3-8 cm) from the HomeLink
button you want to program.
2.
Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter.
Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) blink after 10 secs?
YES
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
NO
NO
3.
Features
Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?
YES
Training
Complete
5.
YES
NO
4.
Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Dose the LED blink within 20 secs?
Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
HomeLink LED
is on.
Press and hold the
HomeLink button again.
The remote-controlled
device should operate.
Training Complete
188
a.
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
a.
The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
b.
Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
Standard transmitter
Rolling code transmitter
Indicator remains on for
about 25 secs.
Indicator blinks rapidly for
two secs, then remains on
for about 23 secs.
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and follow steps
1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Models with navigation system
See the Navigation System Manual for how to operate Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
Models without navigation system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.acura.com/handsfreelink, or call 1888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
Voice control tips
■ HFL Buttons
Hang-up Button
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
Pick-up
Button
Volume Microphone
down
PHONE
Button
Talk Button
Back Button
Selector
Knob
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up) button: Press to end a call.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Back) button: Press to cancel a command.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press
Features
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
Volume up
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
.
Continued
189
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
■ HFL Status Display
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
The audio/information screen notifies you
when there is an incoming call.
Roam Status
Signal Strength
Battery Level Status
HFL Mode
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Features
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Language Selection P. 158
Caller Name
■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You
cannot select a grayed-out option until the
vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags can be called using voice
commands while the vehicle is in motion.
Disabled option
190
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
2 Speed Dial P. 206
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
HFL Menus
1HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
PHONE or
Phone
Speed Dial*1 Display your speed dial entry lists.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
(up to 15 entries per paired phone)
Call History*1
Display the last 20
outgoing calls.
Received Calls
Display the last 20
incoming calls.
Missed Calls
Display the last 20
missed calls.
Features
Dialed Calls
Phonebook*1 Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Dial*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
191
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Redial*1
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Select message and
Text Message
.
Message is read aloud
Read/Stop reading System reads received message aloud, or
Features
stop message from being read.
Reply
Call
Display Message
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
192
Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
See an entire received message
(if more than three lines of text).
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Phone Setup
Connection
Add a New Phone Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a Phone
Connect a phone to the system.
Features
Disconnect Phone Disconnect a paired phone from the
system.
Delete a Phone
Delete a previously paired phone.
Pairing Code
Create a code for a paired phone.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
193
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Add New
Speed Dial*1
Phonebook
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial
number.
Call History
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Phone Number
Features
Existing entry list
Enter a phone number to store as a
speed dial number.
Change Speed Dial Change a previously stored speed dial
number.
Delete Speed Dial Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
Store Voice Tag
Create a voice tag for a speed dial
number.
Change Voice Tag Change a voice tag for a speed dial
number.
Delete Voice Tag
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
194
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial
number.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Auto Transfer
Caller ID Info
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you
enter the vehicle.
Name Priority
Number Priority
Message Notice
System Clear
Prioritize the caller’s phone number as
the caller ID.
Features
Passcode*1
Prioritize the caller’s name as the
caller ID.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Turn incoming text message notifications on or off.
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security
codes.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
195
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1Phone Setup
■ Phone Setup
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
Features
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
196
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
u If a prompt appears asking to connect to
a phone, select No and proceed with
step 2.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select Empty, then press
Features
3. Rotate
to select Connection, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Add a New Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to Select Location.
.
Continued
197
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
6. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
Features
7. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
8. HFL gives you a four-digit pairing code to
input on your phone.
When your phone prompts you, input the
four-digit pairing code.
9. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
198
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
Features
3. Rotate
to select Connection, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Pairing Code, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random, then
press .
Continued
199
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Connection, then Delete a Phone.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
Features
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
u You will receive a notification on the
screen if it is successful.
200
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
■ To Set Up a Text Message Notice Option
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
Features
3. Rotate
to select Message Notice, then
press .
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new text message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
4. Rotate
to select a mode you want, then
press .
Continued
201
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1To Create a Security PIN
■ To Create a Security PIN
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Passcode.
3. Select a phone you want to add a security
PIN to.
u Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
Features
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen.
u Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Rotate
to select, then press . Press
to delete. Press
to enter the
security PIN.
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in step
2.
202
In the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
1Caller’s ID Information
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Caller ID
Info.
3. Rotate
to select a mode you want, then
press .
4. You will receive a notification on the screen
if the change is successful.
Continued
Features
■ Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority mode: A caller’s name is displayed if it
is stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority mode: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.
203
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To Clear the System
Security codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, and all
imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select System
Clear.
3. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
Features
4. You will receive a notification message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Press
to finish.
204
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Message
Work
Other
Pager
Voice
Features
Pref
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Continued
205
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Speed Dial
Features
206
Up to 15 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial, then Add New.
3. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
By Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
By Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
By Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.
1Speed Dial
You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
store a speed dial number:
1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call.
2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
button to
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate
to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tag.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
Features
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate
to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .
Continued
207
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Speed
Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
4. Rotate
to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen. Rotate
to select Yes,
then press .
Features
■ Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
208
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using the imported
■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Continued
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
with a voice tag using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 190
2 Speed Dial P. 206
Features
phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then press
.
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate
to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored speed dial number
with a voice tag using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 190
2 Speed Dial P. 206
209
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using the call history
Features
210
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
list can be directly selected by pressing the
corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select More Speed Dial Lists to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 206
button to
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1Receiving a Call
■ Receiving a Call
HFL Mode
Caller Name
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the
Press the
button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the call.
Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
Features
Continued
211
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1Options During a Call
■ Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
PHONE button.
Features
2. Rotate
to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
212
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1Receiving a Text Message
■ Receiving a Text Message
Continued
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 217
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message feature. Only use the text message feature
when conditions allow you to do so safely.
Features
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message.
2. Rotate
to select Yes to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, press
the BACK button.
213
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
1Displaying Messages
■ Displaying Messages
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
The
icon appears next to an unread message.
Only the first three lines of the received message are
displayed with this option.
2 Displaying an entire message P. 217
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
Features
214
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Using the stop reading or read option
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Stop Reading or
Read, then press .
1Using the stop reading or read option
This option changes to:
• Stop Reading while the text message is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message readout.
• Read when you go to the Text Message menu, or
after you selected Stop Reading. Select this option
to hear the system reading out the selected
message.
Features
Continued
215
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Reply to a message
Features
216
You can reply to a message using one of the
six common phrases available in the system.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Reply, then press .
6. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
7. The reply message you selected is displayed.
Select Yes to send the message.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I'm driving.
• I am on my way.
• I'm running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
After you reply, the following is displayed:
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
■ Making a call to a sender
Features
You can call the text message sender.
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Call, then press .
u HFL begins dialing.
■ Displaying an entire message
1. Press the PHONE button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select to Text Message, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a message, then press
.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading out
the message.
4. Press
to enter the Text Message Menu.
5. Rotate
to select Display Message,
then press .
6. Rotate
to scroll down and display the
entire message.
217
218
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 220
Maximum Load Limit........................ 223
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 225
When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 226
Precautions While Driving................. 229
Continuous Variable Transmission (CVT).. 230
Shifting ............................................ 231
Auto Idle Stop.................................. 236
ECON Button ................................... 239
Cruise Control ................................. 240
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System ............. 243
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .. 245
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 246
Braking
Brake System ................................... 248
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 250
Brake Assist System.......................... 251
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped................................. 252
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 253
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 254
How to Refuel ................................. 255
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 256
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 257
Modifications................................... 257
219
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving
220
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 294
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
1Interior Checks
■ Interior Checks
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 223
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 111
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
Driving
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 135
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 138
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 133
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 132
Continued
221
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 70
Driving
222
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
Label Example
1Maximum Load Limit
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
Continued
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 346
Driving
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 346
223
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
Example2
224
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 344
Driving
225
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
Driving
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
Brake Pedal
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 118
226
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Bring the keyless access remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the keyless
access remote is weak.
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak P. 330
The engine may not start if the keyless access remote
is subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
Driving
■ Starting to Drive
2 Parking Brake P. 248
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
Continued
227
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
■ Creep aid system
With the shift lever in (D , this feature applies brake pressure briefly as you release
the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Move the Shift lever to (D when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then
release the brake pedal.
Driving
228
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine,
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.
Driving
If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while
driving, the engine will shut down and all steering
and brake power assist functions will stop, making it
difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
229
uuWhen DrivinguContinuous Variable Transmission (CVT)
Continuous Variable Transmission (CVT)
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
Driving
230
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Following can damage the under spoiler:
• Parking the vehicle by a parking block
• Parallel parking along the road shoulder
• Driving towards the bottom of a hill
• Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
• Driving on a rutted or bumpy road
• Driving on a road with potholes
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .
■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Release Button
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct speed position before driving.
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Driving
Drive
Used for:
● Normal driving
● Temporarily driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode
Drive (S)
Used for:
● Better acceleration
● Increased engine braking
● Going up or down hills
● Driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode
Continued
231
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
1Shift Lever Operation
■ Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
Tachometer's red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
M (Sequential Shift mode)
Indicator/Gear Position Indicator
Driving
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever
release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.
232
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Whichever position the shift lever is in when driving,
a blinking (D indicator indicates a transmission
problem.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.
■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can also cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The (M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.
Driving
■ When the shift lever is in (S :
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer's
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling out of the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S
to (D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is cancelled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.
Continued
233
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.
Driving
Shift Up
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
6 to 7
Downshifting when pulling
the
paddle shifter.
(Changes to a lower gear)
234
Upshifting when pulling
the
paddle shifter.
(Changes to a higher gear)
Normal Acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (76 km/h)
52 mph (84 km/h)
57 mph (92 km/h)
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift
up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is
blinking.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
1L Mode Operation
■ L Mode Operation
Use this mode to get more power when climbing hills.
To switch to the L mode, pull and hold both paddle shifters ( (+ and (- ) at the same
time with the shift lever in (S .
Use the L mode to get more engine braking in the 7speed manual shift mode.
L is displayed in the 7-speed manual
shift mode indicator.
Driving
To cancel this mode, pull and hold both paddle shifters again, or move the shift lever
from (S to (D . The L indicator goes off.
235
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop
To help maximize fuel economy, Auto Idle Stop shuts off the engine when the
vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating
conditions. The AUTO STOP indicator blinks at this time.
The engine then restarts once the vehicle is
about to move again, and the indicator goes
off.
AUTO STOP
Indicator
Driving
236
If the driver’s door is opened while the
indicator is blinking, a buzzer sounds to notify
you that the Auto Idle Stop function is in
operation.
1Auto Idle Stop
The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:
• Increases in the ECON mode, compared to when
the ECON mode is off, with climate control in use.
• Decreases if you operate the wiper and climate
control simultaneously.
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
■ Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
The auto idle stop may also activate when the brake
pedal is depressed, and the vehicle slows down to a
speed below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The vehicle stops with the shift lever in (D and the brake pedal depressed.
■ Auto idle stop does not activate when:
• The low temperature indicator is on.
• The IMA battery charge is low.
• The bars of the IMA motor power flow monitor do not move when accelerating
or decelerating.
• The transmission fluid temperature is low.
• The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph
(15 km/h) after the engine starts.
• Stopped on a steep incline.
• The shift lever is in a position other than (D or (N .
• Certain ambient conditions (strong sunlight, high or low temperatures, etc.) can
prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating, even if the set temperature and the actual
interior temperature are around the same.
• The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly.
Continued
Driving
■ Auto idle stop may not activate when:
237
uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
■ The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
The brake pedal is released.
■ The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed when:
• The shift position is changed to (R .
• The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The pressure to the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while
stopped on an incline.
• The IMA battery charge becomes low.
• The low temperature indicator comes on.
• Ambient conditions that may differentiate the interior temperature from the set
temperature can also be the cause to start the engine.
Driving
238
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
ECON Button
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission, climate control system, and cruise control.
Driving
239
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
■ Shift positions for cruise control:
3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
When to use
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
1Cruise Control
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
In (D or (S
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
How to use
Driving
240
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
Cruise control is ready to use.
■ Press the CRUISE button on
the steering wheel.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
DECEL/SET Button
On
On
Press and release
On when cruise control begins.
Take your foot off the pedal and press the DECEL/SET button when you reach the
desired speed.
Continued
Driving
The moment you release the DECEL/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise
control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
241
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/ACCEL or DECEL/SET buttons
on the steering wheel.
You can set the vehicle speed using the DECEL/SET
button on the steering wheel when adjusting the
speed with the accelerator and brake pedals.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
Driving
• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increased or decreased by about
10 mph (16 km/h).
1To Cancel
■ To Cancel
CRUISE Button
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/
ACCEL button while driving at a speed of at least 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
CANCEL Button
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
242
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
Continued
Driving
VSA® System
Indicator
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
243
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the
button until you hear a beep.
(VSA® OFF)
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.
Driving
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or
blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the
button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
244
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
U.S. models only
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Monitors the tire pressure while you are
driving. If your vehicle’s tire pressure becomes
significantly low, the low tire pressure/TPMS
indicator comes on and a message appears on
the multi-information display.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE is displayed when a
tire has significantly low pressure.
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
2 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks P. 340
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
Driving
245
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
246
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Driving
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
247
Braking
Brake System
1Parking Brake
■ Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE appears on the multi-information
display.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
Driving
248
To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
uuBrakinguBrake System
■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 251
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 250
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower speed position.
Driving
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
249
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ ABS operation
Driving
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When tire chains are installed.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
250
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Brake Assist System
■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
Driving
251
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with the shift lever in (D .
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
4. Turn off the engine.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
1When Stopped
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
Driving
252
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Models with navigation system
See the Navigation System Manual.
Models without navigation system
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .
■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
Normal View Mode
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
Driving
Camera
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Top Down View Mode
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
selector knob to switch the angle.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.
253
Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded premium gasoline, pump octane number 91 or higher
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause occasional metallic knocking noise in the
engine and will result in decreased engine performance.
Use of gasoline with a pump octane less than 87 can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Acura
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Driving
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit Acura Owners at owners.acura.com. In
Canada, visit www.acura.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more
information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■ Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 liters)
254
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
u The fuel fill door opens.
Push
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
1How to Refuel
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
Cap
Holder
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Driving
Cap
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
255
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
multi-information display.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Driving
256
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liters of
fuel
Kilometers
driven
L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS Airbag, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories
installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s
airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 341
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
Modifications
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Acura Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
Driving
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Acura components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
1Accessories and Modifications
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
257
258
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 260
Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 261
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 262
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 263
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 268
Opening the Hood ........................... 269
Engine Compartment Cover............. 270
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 272
Oil Check ......................................... 273
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 274
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter . 275
Engine Coolant ................................ 277
Transmission Fluid............................ 279
Brake Fluid....................................... 280
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 281
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 282
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 292
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 294
Tire and Loading Information Label .. 295
Tire Labeling .................................... 295
Wear Indicators ............................... 299
Tire Service Life................................ 299
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 300
Tire Rotation.................................... 301
Winter Tires ..................................... 302
12 Volt Battery.................................. 303
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 304
Climate Control System Maintenance...... 305
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 306
Exterior Care.................................... 308
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) .. 297
259
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the continuously variable transmission fluid level monthly.
2 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid P. 279
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Checking the Brake Fluid P. 280
Maintenance
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the multi-information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 266
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 355
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 294
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 282
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 292
260
1Inspection and Maintenance
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the 12 volt
battery or compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
• Do not touch the IMA battery and wiring (orange).
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.
Maintenance
■ Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
261
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Acura genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Acura genuine parts are manufactured according to the same
high quality standards used in Acura vehicles.
Maintenance
262
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the multi-information display every time you set the power mode to ON.
The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
Maintenance
263
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the multi-information display.
You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the
button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the multiinformation display.
Remaining
Engine Oil Life
Maintenance
Service Items
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Maintenance
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0
There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the multi-information display.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 266
Button
264
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Oil Life Display
Explanation
Information
SERVICE DUE SOON
15 %
The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6
percent. Once you switch the display
by pressing the
(information) button, this message
will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and
serviced soon.
SERVICE DUE NOW
5%
The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the
button to end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
switch to another display.
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
SERVICE PAST DUE
Negative Distance
The remaining engine oil life has
The engine oil life has passed.
passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be
distance appears after driving over 10 inspected and serviced immediately.
miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another
display.
U.S.
The system message indicator (
Canada
Maintenance
Maintenance Message
) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Continued
265
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
1Maintenance Service Items
■ Maintenance Service Items
System Message
Indicator
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
Maintenance Minder Message
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Main
Item
CODE
A
B
●
●
●
●
Maintenance
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
266
Sub
Items
CODE
1
2
●
●
●
●
3
4
●
●
●
5
●
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
1Resetting the Display
■ Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Maintenance
Item Codes
Engine Oil Life
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
Button
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Go to the MAINTENANCE INFO. group.
2 Customized Features P. 95
Maintenance
SEL/RESET Button
3. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
4. Select RESET with the
button, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button.
267
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Transmission Fluid
Dipstick
(Yellow)
12 Volt Battery
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
268
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
3. Slide the hood latch lever in the center of
the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop
function is activated.
Lever
Grip
Clamp
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
Maintenance
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
Support Rod
269
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover
Engine Compartment Cover
The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by a cover.
You may need to remove the cover when you perform certain maintenance work.
To remove the cover:
Clip (B)
Clip (A)
Holding clip (A-type)
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Maintenance
Push until the
pin is flat
Engine Compartment Cover
Remove the holding clips
270
1Engine Compartment Cover
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Compartment Cover
1Engine Compartment Cover
Holding clip (B-type)
Press down the center pin until it clicks to unlock it.
center pin
Push the center pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert
the clip into the hole and press on the center pin until
it is flat.
Maintenance
Push until
the pin is
flat.
271
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Acura Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Acura Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.
Maintenance
Ambient Temperature
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
272
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
Lower Mark
Maintenance
Upper Mark
273
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Maintenance
274
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the multiinformation display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
Under Cover
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the screws on the undercarriage
and slide the under cover backward, then
remove.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Screw
Drain Bolt
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
Maintenance
Washer
Continued
275
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Oil Filter
Maintenance
276
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter rubber seal.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.8 US qt (3.6 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Engine Coolant
1Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
■ Reserve Tank
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
MAX
NOTICE
If temperatures consistently below -22°F (-30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Acura antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Acura coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction
or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled
with Acura antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
MIN
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Continued
Maintenance
Reserve Tank
277
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
1Radiator
■ Radiator
Radiator Cap
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 270
3. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and
relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
4. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
5. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
6. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
7. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Maintenance
278
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Transmission Fluid
■ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Acura Continuously Variable
Transmission Fluid with other transmission
fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Acura
Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle’s transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Acura Continuously Variable
Transmission Fluid is not covered by Acura’s new
vehicle warranty.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Maintenance
Check the fluid level when the engine is at normal operating temperature.
1. Park on level ground, and start the engine.
2. Wait until the radiator fan starts and then
turn off the engine.
u Perform step 3 after waiting for about 60
seconds (less than 90 seconds).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow) from the
transmission and wipe it with a clean cloth.
Upper Mark
HOT
Lower Mark
4.
Insert the dipstick all the way back into the
Range
transmission securely, as shown in the
image.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid
level.
u It should be between the upper and
lower marks in the HOT range.
6. If the level is below the lower mark, add
fluid into the dipstick hole to bring it to the
level between the upper and lower marks,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
279
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid
Brake Fluid
Specified fluid: Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
NOTICE
■ Checking the Brake Fluid
Check the fluid level several seconds after you
turn the power mode to ON.
MAX
MIN
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Brake Reservoir
1Brake Fluid
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Acura Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.
Maintenance
280
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid using the washer fluid level gauge on the
cap.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Level Gauge
Maintenance
281
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
1Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3)
Low beam headlight:
NOTICE
55 W (H11 for halogen bulb Type)
35 W (D2S for high voltage discharge type)
■ High Beam Headlight
Bulb
Tab
Driver side
1. Remove the engine compartment cover.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 270
All models
Coupler
Maintenance
282
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
High Voltage Discharge Types
■ Low Beam Headlights
High voltage can remain in the circuit for a long period of time after the light is
switched off. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the high voltage discharge type
bulbs yourself. Ask a dealer to inspect and replace low beam headlights.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
1Low Beam Headlights
Halogen Types
■ Low Beam Headlights
Holding clip (C-type)
1. Remove the engine compartment cover.
Clip (C)
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 270
Center Pin
Passenger side
2. Remove the holding clip (C) using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then remove the upper part of
the windshield washer reservoir.
All models
3. Rotate the cover to the left, and remove.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Cover
Continued
Maintenance
Push until the
pin is flat.
283
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs
Coupler
Tab
All models
4. Pull the tab to remove the coupler.
5. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
6. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Bulb
Fog Light Bulbs
1Fog Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 55 W (H11) for halogen bulb Type
1. Remove the screw using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
u The screw does not drop.
Maintenance
284
Dropping
prevention
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs
2. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver into the tab at
the inside edge of the cover, then pull
straight out as indicated to remove the
cover.
Cover
3. Remove the screws using a Phillips-head
screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light
assembly out of the bumper.
Screws
4. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
5. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
6. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Maintenance
Bulb
Tab
Coupler
285
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W
Screw
Clip (D)
Inner
Fender
Clips (A)
Holding clip (D-type)
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
2. Remove the holding clips (A), (D) and screw,
pull the inner fender back.
Clip
2 Engine Compartment Cover P. 270
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Maintenance
286
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is
flat.
Push until the
pin is flat.
Bulb
Socket
uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Parking/Side Marker Light: 5 W
Coupler
Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner
fender back in the same way as when
replacing the front turn signal light bulbs.
2 Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs P. 286
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Tab
Socket
Maintenance
Bulb
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
287
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and
Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Brake/Rear Side Marker/Taillight: 21/5 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W
1. Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip
screwdriver to remove the cover.
u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
Cover
2. Remove the mounting bolts.
3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
Maintenance
288
Bolts
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
Bulb
Socket
4. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the light assembly by sliding it on
to the guide on the body.
Guide
Maintenance
289
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light Bulbs
Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
Clips
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Maintenance
290
Socket
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulb
Rear License Plate Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Remove the screw from the center of the
fastener using a Phillips-head screwdriver.
2. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
Lining
Clip
Bulb
Socket
Fastener
3. Remove the license plate light assembly by
squeezing the tabs on both sides of the
socket.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Maintenance
High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
High-mount brake light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Acura dealer inspect
and replace the light bulbs.
291
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
Lock Tab
Maintenance
292
2. Place a cloth on the edge of the lock tab.
Push the lock tab up with a flat-tip screw
driver.
3. Slide the blade from the wiper arm.
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
4. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
Blade
Blade
Retainer
Maintenance
5. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
6. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
7. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
8. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
293
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
Maintenance
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2
kgf/cm2) per month.
■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 299
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
294
1Checking Tires
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4 – 6 psi (30 – 40 kPa, 0.3 – 0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than
if checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Models with a spare tire
Measure the spare tire pressure once a month or
before long trips.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example
Tire Labeling
Example
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare, if
equipped.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare, if equipped.
1Tire Size
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■ Tire Size
Maintenance
Maximum
Tire Load
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P205/55R16 89H
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
205: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
16: Rim diameter in inches.
89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
Continued
295
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology
Maintenance
296
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Continued
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Maintenance
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
297
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Maintenance
298
■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
1Traction
■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
1Temperature
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWear Indicators
Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
* Not available on all models
Maintenance
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including a spare *, should be removed from service after 10 years
from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
299
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
U.S. models only
If you replace a wheel, only use TPMS specified wheels approved for your vehicle.
Maintenance
300
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the multi-information
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Front
Direction Mark
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Maintenance
Front
301
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the
law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
Maintenance
302
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
1Winter Tires
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
12 Volt Battery
Checking the 12 Volt Battery
The battery condition is being monitored by the sensor on the negative terminal. If
there is a problem with the sensor, the warning message on multi-information
display will let you know. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer
Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 154
• The clock resets.
2 Setting the Clock P. 104
• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (-) cable first, and reconnect it last.
112 Volt Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Rinse the terminals with water. Cloth/towel dry the
battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.
Maintenance
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.
* Not available on all models
303
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.
Press
Battery
Maintenance
304
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
2. Remove the upper half by carefully prying
on the edge with a coin.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the transmitter.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Climate Control System Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects
pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let
you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system
deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up
easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please
contact a dealer for replacement.
Maintenance
305
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Opening
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
Maintenance
306
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
uuCleaninguInterior Care
1Floor Mats
■ Floor Mats
Unlock
Lock
The front floor mats hook over the floor
anchors, which keep the mats from sliding
forward. To remove the mats for cleaning,
turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mats after cleaning,
turn the knobs to the lock position.
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
Maintenance
* Not available on all models
307
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.
■ Using an Automated Car Wash
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.
Air Intake Vents
■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
Maintenance
308
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
uuCleaninguExterior Care
1Applying Wax
■ Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
■ Cleaning the Window
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
Continued
Maintenance
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
309
uuCleaninguExterior Care
■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Maintenance
310
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 312
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire....... 313
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 322
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 329
If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is
Weak ............................................. 330
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 331
Jump Starting.................................... 332
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 334
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 335
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 337
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 337
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 338
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On......................... 339
If the IMA Indicator Comes On ........ 340
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 340
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 341
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 343
Emergency Towing........................... 344
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On .................................................339
311
Tools
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the cargo area.
Wheel Nut Wrench/Jack Handle
Handling the Unexpected
Jack
Jack Handle Bar
Storage Bag
Tool Case
312
Jack
If a Tire Goes Flat
Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
This vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire. If the tire has a large cut or is otherwise
severely damaged, you will need to have the vehicle towed. If the tire only has a
small puncture, from a nail for instance, you can use the temporary tire repair kit so
that you can drive to the nearest service station for a more permanent repair.
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then stop in a safe place.
■ Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
Pressure Gauge
Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
Tire Sealant
Expiration Date
Pressure Relief
Button
Instruction
Manual
Air Only Hose (Black)
SEALANT/AIR side
The kit should not be used in the following situations.
Instead, contact a dealer or a roadside assistant to
have the vehicle towed.
• The tire sealant has expired.
• More than one tire is punctured.
• The puncture or cut is larger than 3/16 inch (4 mm).
• The tire side wall is damaged or the puncture is
outside the tire contact area.
Contact
Area
When the puncture is:
Kit Use
Smaller than 3/16 inch
(4 mm)
Yes
Larger than 3/16 inch
(4 mm)
No
• Damage has been caused by driving with the tire
AIR ONLY side
Inflator Switch
extremely under inflated.
• The tire bead is no longer seated.
• The rim is damaged.
Handling the Unexpected
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
2. Put the shift lever in (P .
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
1Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Do not remove a nail or screw that punctured the
tire. If you remove it from the tire, you may not be
able to repair the puncture using the kit.
Repair Notification Label
Power Plug
Speed Restriction Label
Selector Switch
Continued
NOTICE
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent other than the
one provided in the kit that came with your vehicle. If
used it, you may permanently damage the tire
pressure sensor.
313
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
1Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair the Flat Tire
When making a temporary repair, carefully read the
instruction manual provided with the kit.
In cold temperatures, the sealant may not flow easily.
In this situation, warm it up for five minutes before
using.
Handling the Unexpected
314
2. Take the kit out of the case.
3. Place the kit face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, and away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
1Injecting Sealant and Air
■ Injecting Sealant and Air
Valve Cap
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
stem.
Valve Stem
Tire sealant contains substances that are
harmful and can be fatal if swallowed.
If accidentally swallowed, do not induce
vomiting. Drink plenty of water and get
medical attention immediately.
For skin or eye contact, flush with cool
water and get medical attention if
necessary.
The sealant can permanently stain clothing and other
materials. Be careful during handling and wipe away
any spills immediately.
Sealant/Air Hose
Handling the Unexpected
2. Remove the sealant/air hose from the
packaging.
Sealant/Air Hose
3 WARNING
3. Attach the sealant/air hose onto the tire
valve stem. Screw it until it is tight.
Valve Stem
Continued
315
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
4. Plug in the compressor to the accessory
power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
5. Start the engine.
u Keep the engine running while injecting
sealant and air.
1Injecting Sealant and Air
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 66
6. Turn the selector switch to SEALANT/AIR.
Handling the Unexpected
NOTICE
Do not operate the tire repair kit compressor for
more than 15 minutes. The accessory power socket
and compressor can overheat and become
permanently damaged.
SEALANT/AIR side
Pressure Gauge
ON
OFF
316
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
7. Press the inflator switch to turn on the
compressor.
u The compressor starts injecting sealant
and air into the tire.
8. When the sealant injection is complete
continue to add air.
9. After the air pressure reaches 32 psi (220
kPa), turn off the kit.
u To check the pressure, occasionally turn
off the compressor and read the gauge.
Until the sealant injection is complete, the pressure
shown on the pressure gauge will appear higher than
actual. After the sealant injection is complete the
pressure will drop and then begin to rise again as the
tire is inflated with air. This is normal. To accurately
measure the air pressure using the gauge, turn the air
compressor off only after the sealant injection is
complete.
If the required air pressure is not reached within 10
minutes, the tire may be too severely damaged for
the kit to provide the necessary seal and your vehicle
will need to be towed.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
Sealant/Air Hose
10. Unplug the power plug from the accessory
power socket.
11. Unscrew the sealant/air hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
12. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
1Injecting Sealant and Air
See a dealer for a replacement sealant bottle and
proper disposal of an empty bottle.
Valve Stem
Repair Notification Label
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
13. Apply the repair notification label to the
flat surface of the wheel.
u The wheel surface must be clean to
ensure the label adheres properly.
317
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
■ Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
1. Apply the speed restriction label to the
location as shown.
2. Drive the vehicle for about 10 minutes.
u Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
3. Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
Speed Restriction Label
Handling the Unexpected
318
4. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.
5. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
u Do not turn the air compressor on to
check the pressure.
2 Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
P. 320
Air Only Hose
1Distributing the Sealant in the Tire
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Stop and recheck the air pressure after every 10
minutes of driving as necessary until you reach the
nearest service station where you should have the tire
permanently repaired or replaced.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
6. If the air pressure is:
• Less than 19 psi (130 kPa):
Do not add air or continue driving. The leak is too severe. Call for help and
have your vehicle towed.
2 Emergency Towing P. 344
• 32 psi (220 kPa) or more:
Continue driving for another 10 minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
u If the air does not go down after the 10 minute driving, you do not need to
check the pressure any more.
• Greater than 19 psi (130kPa), but less than 32 psi (220 kPa):
Turn the air compressor on to inflate the tire until the tire pressure reaches 32
psi (220 kPa).
Then drive carefully for 10 more minutes or until you reach the nearest service
station. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
u You should repeat this procedure as long as the air pressure is within this
range.
7. Press the pressure relief button until the gauge returns to 0 psi (0 kPa).
8. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
Handling the Unexpected
Continued
319
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
■ Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
You can use the kit to inflate a non-punctured under-inflated tire.
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
2 Getting Ready to Temporarily Repair
the Flat Tire P. 313
2. Remove the kit from the case.
3. Place the kit, face up, on flat ground near
the flat tire, away from traffic. Do not
place the kit on its side.
4. Remove the air only hose from the kit.
Handling the Unexpected
Air Only Hose
5. Remove the valve cap.
Valve Cap
Air Only Hose
Valve Stem
320
6. Attach the air only hose onto the tire valve
stem. Screw it until it is tight.
1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
NOTICE
Do not operate the temporary tire repair kit
compressor for more than 15 minutes. The accessory
power socket and compressor can overheat and
become permanently damaged.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuTemporarily Repairing a Flat Tire
7. Plug in the compressor to the accessory
power socket.
u Be careful not to pinch the cord in a
door or window.
8. Start the engine.
u Keep the engine running while injecting
air.
2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 66
ON
Pressure Relief Button
12. Turn off the kit.
u Check the pressure gauge on the air
compressor.
u If overinflated, press the pressure relief
button.
13. Unplug the kit from the accessory power
socket.
14. Unscrew the air only hose from the tire
valve stem. Reinstall the valve cap.
15. Press the pressure relief button until the
gauge returns 0 psi (0 kPa).
16. Repackage and properly stow the kit.
3 WARNING
Running the engine with the vehicle in an
enclosed or even partly enclosed area can
cause a rapid build-up of toxic carbon
monoxide.
Breathing this colorless, odorless gas can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
Only run the engine to power the air
compressor with the vehicle outdoors.
Handling the Unexpected
AIR ONLY
side
9. Turn the selector switch to AIR ONLY.
10. Press the inflator switch to turn on the kit.
u The compressor starts to inject air into
the tire.
11. Inflate the tire to the specified air pressure.
1Inflating An Under-inflated Tire
321
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full size tire repaired or
replaced.
Handling the Unexpected
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface, and apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever in (P .
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
U.S. models only
Do not use a puncture-repairing agent other than the
Tire Repair Kit provided with your vehicle, as some
tire repair agents can cause damage to the pressure
sensors.
322
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
Zip Fastener
1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk.
2. Open the spare tire cover.
3. Turn the anchor bolt left to remove the bolt
and adapter.
4. Pull the spare tire and cover toward you to
take the tire out.
Spare tire
Anchor Bolt and Adapter
Jack
lid
The spare tire is stored at the back of the trunk,
behind the rear seat-backs.
Handling the Unexpected
5. Move the jack to the left to allow it to be
removed.
6. Pull up the trunk floor lid and take out the
wheel nut wrench from the tool case.
Tool Case
Continued
323
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
7. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
Handling the Unexpected
324
8. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
9. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
1How to Set Up the Jack
■ How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
Jack
Handle
Bar
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Continued
325
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
■ Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
326
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
1Storing the Flat Tire
■ Storing the Flat Tire
1. Securely store the jack, and put wheel nut
and wrench back in the tool case.
2. Put the flat tire in the storage bag provided
with your vehicle.
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
3. Place it on the passenger side of the trunk
floor lid.
The flat tire should be positioned towards the
passenger side due to trunk configuration. Avoid
storing it forcefully against the trunk sides.
327
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
U.S. models
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. CHECK TPMS
SYSTEM appears on the multi-information display, but this is normal.
Handling the Unexpected
328
After you replace the tire with a specified regular tire, the warning message on the
multi-information display and the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will go off after
a few miles (kilometers).
1TPMS and the Spare Tire
The system does not monitor the pressure of the
spare tire. Manually check the spare tire pressure to
be sure that it is correct.
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 332
Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The 12 volt battery may be dead.
Check each of the items on the
right and respond accordingly.
Checklist
Check for a message on the multi-information display.
● If the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR START BUTTON message appears
2 If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak P. 330
uMake sure the keyless remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 124
2 Checking the 12 Volt Battery P. 303
●
If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 341
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 226
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
Handling the Unexpected
Check brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Immobilizer System P. 118
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 86
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 343
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 344
329
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
If the Keyless Access Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
330
If the beeper sounds, the TO START, HOLD REMOTE NEAR START BUTTON
message appears on the multi-information display, the indicator on the ENGINE
START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start. Start the engine as
follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the A logo on the keyless
access remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the keyless access remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds and the
indicator stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button about for three seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop. Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
without depressing the brake pedal.
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.
Handling the Unexpected
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place.
1Emergency Engine Stop
331
Jump Starting
1Jump Starting
■ Jump Starting Procedure
Handling the Unexpected
332
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the assisting vehicle's + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
assisting vehicle's - terminal.
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cable clips so that they do
not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
uuJump Startingu
■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
Handling the Unexpected
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's battery
- terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the assisting vehicle's battery
+ terminal.
333
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of (P position.
■ Releasing the Lock
Slot
Cover
Handling the Unexpected
Release Button
Shift Lock Release Slot
334
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the built-in key from the keyless
access remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• ENGINE TOO HOT appears on the multi-information display or the engine
suddenly loses power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■ First thing to do
Continued
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with ENGINE TOO HOT
message on the multi-information display may
damage the engine.
Handling the Unexpected
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
335
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
■ Next thing to do
1How to Handle Overheating
MAX
MIN
Reserve Tank
Handling the Unexpected
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the ENGINE TOO
HOT message on the multi-information
display goes off.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check if the ENGINE TOO
HOT message on the multi-information display appears again.
If it does not, resume driving. If it does, contact a dealer for repairs.
336
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the 12 volt battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the climate control system, rear defogger, and other electrical
systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the 12 volt battery.
Handling the Unexpected
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
This indicator may blink after starting when the
outside temperature is below -20°F (-30°C). It will
stop blinking after the IMA battery warms up.
337
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
■ Reasons for indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected by a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■ Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check if the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, follow the procedures described earlier to check the
fuel fill cap.
338
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with EPS.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
Handling the Unexpected
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
339
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the IMA Indicator Comes On
If the IMA Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for Indicator to Come On
Comes on when there is a problem with the hybrid system.
■ What to Do When the Indicator Comes On
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected by a
dealer.
U.S. models
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
340
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low. If there is a problem with the TPMS or
the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one
minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set
the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
and check to see if any applicable fuse is
blown.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and box cover number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Amps
70 A
40 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
100 A
50 A
60 A
60 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
−
40 A
−
20 A
20 A
−
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
−
−
−
−
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Circuit Protected
Oil Level
Fog Lights
IMA 1
Hazard
FI Sub
IG Coil
Stop
Horn
IMA 2
Right Headlight Low Beam*1
Right Headlight Low Beam
(HID)*2
IGP
DBW
Left Headlight Low Beam*1
Left Headlight Low Beam
(HID)*2
Booster SOL
MG Clutch
WASHER
SMALL
Interior Lights
Backup
Amps
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
Handling the Unexpected
■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Circuit Protected
EPS
Booster Motor
ABS/VSA Motor
ABS/VSA FSR
WIPER
Main Fuse
IG Main
Fuse Box Main
Fuse Box Main 2
Headlight Main
ST/MG SW*1
Rear Defogger
−
Blower
−
Sub Fan Motor
Main Fan Motor
−
IG Coil 2
Starter DIAG, ST MG
IG Coil 1
−
−
−
−
*1:Models with halogen bulb low beam
headlights
*2:Models with discharge headlights
Continued
341
uuFusesuFuse Locations
■ Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard.
Fuse Label
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
342
Circuit Protected
−
ACG
SRS
Fuel Pump
Meter
Power Window
VB SOL *
Door Lock Motor 2 (Unlock)
Door Lock Motor 1 (Unlock)
* Not available on all models
Amps
−
15 A
10 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
Circuit Protected
10
−
11
Moonroof
12 Driver’s Power Seat Sliding *
13 Driver’s Power Seat Reclining *
14
Seat Heaters *
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
15
(Unlock)
16
−
17
−
18
−
19
ACC
20
ACC Key Lock
21
Daytime Running Lights
22
HAC
23
HYBRID A/C
24
ABS/VSA
25
ACC
26
−
27
Accessory Power Socket
28
−
29
ODS
Driver’s Door Lock Motor
30
(Lock)
31
SMART
32
Door Lock Motor 2 (Lock)
33
Door Lock Motor 1 (Lock)
34
Small Lights
Amps
−
20 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(15 A)
10 A
−
−
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
−
20 A
−
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Circuit Protected
Amps
Illumination
7.5 A
−
−
Premium Audio *
(20 A)
Left Headlight High Beam
10 A
Right Headlight High Beam
10 A
TPMS *
(7.5 A)
Door Lock
20 A
Driver’s Power Window
20 A
Rear Passenger’s Side Power
20 A
Window
Front Passenger’s Side Power
20 A
Window
Rear Driver’s Side Power
20 A
Window
−
−
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse
Combined
Fuse
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 341 to 342.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse Puller
1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK). Turn the headlights and all
accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
343
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
Handling the Unexpected
344
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 346
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number ......................................... 348
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 349
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 350
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 351
Warranty Coverages ........................ 353
Authorized Manuals......................... 355
Client Service Information ............... 356
345
Specifications
■ Vehicle Specifications
■ Engine Specifications
■ Light Bulbs
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
Displacement
Spark Plugs
Headlights (Low Beam)
Acura ILX Hybrid
2
3
5
3,968 lbs (1,800 kg)
91 cu-in (1,497 cm3)
NGK
DILFR6J11
■ Fuel
Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity
Premium unleaded gasoline, Pump octane
number of 91 or higher
13.2 US gal (50 ℓ)
2,138 lbs (970 kg)
1,962 lbs (890 kg)
■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
HFC-134a (R-134a)
13.2 – 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)
SE-10Y
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)
Headlights (High Beam)
Fog Lights
Front Turn Signal Lights
Parking/Side Marker Lights
Brake/Rear Side Marker/Taillight
Back-Up Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Light
Trunk Light
Interior Lights
Map Light
Ceiling Light
Foot light
Glove Box light
Vanity Mirror light
35W (D2S)*1
55W (H11)*2
60W (HB3)
55W (H11)
21W
5W
21/5W
16W
21W
LED
5W
5W
LED
8W
1.4W
LED
2W
*1: Vehicle with discharge headlights
*2: Vehicle with halogen bulb low beam headlights
Information
346
uuSpecificationsu
■ Brake Fluid
Specified
Acura Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■ Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity
■ Engine Oil
Recommended
Capacity
Acura Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid
Change
3.0 US qt (2.8 ℓ)
■ Tire
·Genuine Acura Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
3.6 US qt (3.4 ℓ)
Change
including
3.8 US qt (3.6 ℓ)
filter
Regular
Compact
Spare*1
Wheel Size
■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio
Capacity
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare*1
P205/55R16 89H
32 (220 [2.2])
T135/80D15 99M
60 (420 [4.2])
16 x 6 1/2J
15 x 4T
*1: Vehicles with optional spare tire kit
Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.37 US gal (5.18 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.125 US gal (0.475 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
Information
347
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle's VIN, engine number and transmission number are
shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Vehicle Identification Number
Engine Number
Cover
IMA Motor Number
Information
348
Transmission Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification Number
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
U.S. AcuraLink
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
U.S. models only
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
Information
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
349
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
350
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has “Readiness Codes,” as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes as a test to see if your vehicle’s emissions components
are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The
malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the
readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the 12 volt
battery is disconnected, and set again only after
several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
Continued
Information
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 °F and 95 °F (4 °C and 35 °C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
351
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without
moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you
cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for
at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information
352
Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Information
Accessory Limited Warranty – Acura accessories are covered under this warranty.
Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Acura replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
Continued
353
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Acura
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
Information
354
Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express:
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
1Authorized Manuals
For Canadian Owners:
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you
may require.
■ For U.S. Owners:
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
Information
355
Client Service Information
Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Acura Client Relations/
Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Acura Client Relations
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
Information
356
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Acura Client Services
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: acura_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
1Client Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number and Transmission
Number P. 348
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode ................... 233
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Operation ............................................... 234
A
Recommended CDs................................. 184
Recommended Devices............................ 186
Security Code.......................................... 154
Theft Protection ...................................... 154
USB Adapter Cable.................................. 153
USB Flash Drives ...................................... 186
Audio/Information Screen ....................... 156
Authorized Manuals ................................ 355
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking................. 113
Customize................................................. 95
Auto Idle Stop .......................................... 236
Auto Idle Stop Indicator ............................ 75
Automatic Lighting .................................. 127
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 153
Average Fuel Economy .............................. 91
Average Fuel Economy Records ................ 91
Average Speed ........................................... 92
B
Battery ...................................................... 303
Charging System Indicator................. 72, 337
Jump Starting.......................................... 332
Maintenance (Checking the 12 Volt
Battery) ................................................. 303
Maintenance (Replacing) ......................... 304
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 32
Beverage Holders ..................................... 143
Bluetooth® Audio ..................................... 176
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................... 189
Booster Seats (For Children) ...................... 65
Index
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 250
Accessories and Modifications ................ 257
Accessory Power Socket........................... 144
Acura Hybrid System.................................. 12
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 277
Engine Oil ............................................... 274
Washer ................................................... 281
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 272
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 140
Front Seats.............................................. 135
Head Restraints....................................... 138
Mirrors.................................................... 133
Steering Wheel ....................................... 132
Temperature ............................................. 90
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 146
Changing the Mode................................ 146
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 147
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 305
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 146
Sensor .................................................... 149
Synchronized Mode ................................. 148
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 146
Air Pressure ............................................... 294
Airbags ........................................................ 39
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45
After a Collision......................................... 42
Airbag Care ............................................... 53
Event Data Recorders................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 42
Indicator ........................................ 50, 74, 78
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 51
Sensors...................................................... 45
Side Airbag Cutoff System ......................... 48
Side Airbag Off Indicator ........................... 48
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 49
AM/FM Radio ............................................ 161
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 250
Indicator .................................................... 73
Armrest ..................................................... 140
Audio Remote Controls............................ 159
Audio System ............................................ 152
Adjusting the Sound ................................ 160
Auxiliary Input Jack .................................. 153
Error Messages ........................................ 180
General Information ................................ 183
iPhone ..................................................... 186
iPod......................................................... 168
MP3/WMA/AAC ...................................... 173
Pandora® ................................................. 171
Reactivating............................................. 154
357
Brake System............................................. 248
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 250
Brake Assist System ................................. 251
Brake System Indicator....................... 71, 339
Fluid ........................................................ 280
Foot Brake ............................................... 249
Indicator ............................................ 71, 339
Parking Brake .......................................... 248
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 131
Bulb Replacement..................................... 282
Back-Up Light Bulbs................................. 290
Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Turn Signal
Light and Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs .. 288
Bulb Specifications................................... 346
Fog Lights................................................ 284
Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs ................... 286
Headlights ............................................... 282
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 291
Parking/Side Marker Light Bulbs............... 287
Rear License Plate Light............................ 291
C
Index
358
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 66
Carrying Cargo.................................. 221, 223
CD Player ................................................... 165
Certification Label .................................... 348
Changing Bulbs......................................... 282
Charge/Assist Gauge................................... 86
Charging System Indicator ................. 72, 337
Child Safety................................................. 54
Childproof Door Locks............................. 112
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 117
Child Seat.................................................... 54
Booster Seats ............................................ 65
Child Seat for Infants................................. 56
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 57
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt.................................................. 61
Larger Children ......................................... 64
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 56
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 58
Using a Tether........................................... 63
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 112
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 308
Cleaning the Interior................................ 306
Client Service Information ....................... 356
Climate Control System............................ 146
Changing the Mode ................................ 146
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 147
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 305
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 146
Sensors ................................................... 149
Synchronized Mode................................. 148
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 146
Clock.......................................................... 104
Coat Hook................................................. 144
Compact Spare Tire (Optional)................ 322
Console Compartment ............................. 142
Continuous Variable Transmission
(CVT) ....................................................... 230
Creeping................................................. 230
Fluid ....................................................... 279
Kickdown ............................................... 230
Operating the Shift Lever ........................ 232
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 334
Shifting................................................... 231
Controls .................................................... 103
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 277
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 278
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 277
Low Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Overheating............................................ 335
Creep Aid System ..................................... 228
Creeping ................................................... 230
Cruise Control .......................................... 240
Indicator ................................................... 80
Cup Holders .............................................. 143
Customized Features ................................. 95
D
Daytime Running Lights ..........................
Dead Battery ............................................
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .................................................
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ...............
Dimming
Headlights ..............................................
Rearview Mirror ......................................
129
332
147
349
126
133
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 273
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 126
Doors ........................................................ 105
Auto Door Locking.................................. 113
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 113
Door Open Indicator ........................... 31, 75
Keys........................................................ 105
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside .................................................... 111
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside ................................................. 107
Lockout prevention system...................... 110
DOT Tire Quality Grading........................ 297
Driving ...................................................... 219
Braking ................................................... 248
Continuous Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 230
Cruise Control ........................................ 240
Shifting Speed Position ........................... 231
Starting the Engine ................................. 226
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 305
E
F
Features .................................................... 151
Filters......................................................... 305
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 305
Oil........................................................... 275
Flat Tire ..................................................... 313
Floor Mats................................................. 307
Fluids
Brake ...................................................... 280
Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid ...................................................... 279
Engine Coolant ....................................... 277
Windshield Washer ................................. 281
Fog Light Indicator..................................... 77
Foot Brake ................................................ 249
Front Airbags (SRS)..................................... 42
Front Seats ................................................ 135
Adjusting ................................................ 135
Fuel...................................................... 21, 254
Economy ................................................. 256
Gauge....................................................... 86
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 91
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 73
Range ....................................................... 91
Recommendation .................................... 254
Refueling................................................. 254
Fuel Economy ........................................... 256
Fuel Economy Indicator ....................... 11, 90
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 21, 255
Message.................................................. 338
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 21, 255
Index
Eco Assist System........................................ 10
ECON Button ............................................ 239
ECON Mode Indicator................................ 80
Elapsed Time .............................................. 91
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 75, 339
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 243
Emergency ................................................ 344
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 117
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ....... 351
Engine ....................................................... 348
Coolant ................................................... 277
Jump Starting .......................................... 332
Oil ........................................................... 272
Starting ................................................... 226
Switch Buzzer .......................................... 125
Engine Compartment Cover .................... 270
Engine Coolant ......................................... 277
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 278
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 277
Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 79
Overheating ............................................ 335
Engine Oil ................................................. 272
Adding .................................................... 274
Checking ................................................. 273
Displaying Oil Life .................................... 264
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 75, 337
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 272
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 124
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System ............................................... 75, 339
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .. 66
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 134
Exterior Care (Cleaning) ........................... 308
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 134
359
Fuses .......................................................... 341
Inspecting and Changing ......................... 343
Locations ......................................... 341, 342
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 256
Gauge ....................................................... 86
Information ............................................. 254
Instant Fuel Economy................................. 91
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 73
Refueling ................................................. 254
Gauges......................................................... 86
Glass (care) ................................................ 308
Glove Box .................................................. 142
H
Index
360
Halogen Bulbs................................... 282, 283
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 311
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ............................... 189
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook
and Call History ..................................... 205
Automatic Transferring ............................ 203
Caller’s ID Information ............................. 203
HFL Buttons ............................................. 189
HFL Menus .............................................. 191
HFL Status Display.................................... 190
Making a Call .......................................... 208
Options During a Call .............................. 212
Phone Setup............................................ 196
Receiving a Call ....................................... 211
Speed Dial............................................... 206
Text Message .................................. 201, 213
To Clear the System ................................ 204
To Create a Security PIN .......................... 202
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
Head Restraints ........................................ 138
Headlights................................................. 126
Aiming .................................................... 282
Automatic Operation............................... 127
Dimming ......................................... 126, 129
Operating................................................ 126
Heaters (Seat) ........................................... 145
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)............................... 189
High-Beam Indicator .................................. 77
Hill Start Assist System ............................. 228
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 187
I
Identification Numbers ............................ 348
Engine and Transmission ......................... 348
Vehicle Identification ............................... 348
Illumination Control................................. 131
Knob....................................................... 131
IMA Battery Charge Level Indicator/Power
Flow Monitor ............................................ 93
IMA System Indicator ................................. 77
Immobilizer System .................................. 118
Indicator.................................................... 78
Indicators.................................................... 70
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 73
Auto Idle Stop........................................... 75
Brake System ............................................ 71
Charging System............................... 72, 337
CRUISE CONTROL ............................. 80, 241
CRUISE MAIN.................................... 80, 240
Door and Trunk Open ......................... 31, 75
Door Open................................................ 31
ECON Mode ..................................... 80, 239
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System ............................................ 75, 339
Fog Light .................................................. 77
High-Beam................................................ 77
IMA System .............................................. 77
Immobilizer System ................................... 78
Keyless Access System............................... 79
Lights On .................................................. 77
Low Fuel ................................................... 73
Low Oil Pressure ............................... 75, 337
Low Temperature...................................... 79
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS .................... 76, 245
Maintenance Minder............................... 263
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 71, 338
Parking Brake and Brake System ....... 70, 339
Seat Belt Reminder.............................. 33, 73
Security System Alarm............................... 79
Shift Lever Position.................................... 72
Side Airbag Off ................................... 52, 78
Supplemental Restraint System ........... 50, 74
System Message ....................................... 76
Transmission ............................................. 72
Turn Signal ............................................... 77
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System ............................................ 74, 243
VSA® OFF.......................................... 74, 244
Information .............................................. 345
Information Buttons ............................ 87, 95
Instant Fuel Economy ................................ 91
Instrument Panel........................................ 69
Brightness Control .................................. 131
Interior Lights........................................... 141
Interior Rearview Mirror ......................... 133
Internet Radio .......................................... 171
iPhone....................................................... 186
iPod........................................................... 168
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)........................ 325
Jump Starting........................................... 332
K
106
108
110
105
110
106
112
107
L
L Mode Operation .................................... 235
Language (HFL)......................................... 190
LATCH (Child Seats) .................................... 59
Lights................................................. 126, 282
Automatic ............................................... 127
Bulb Replacement.................................... 282
Daytime Running Lights ........................... 129
Fog Lights................................................ 129
High-Beam Indicator .................................. 77
Interior .................................................... 141
Light Switches ......................................... 126
Lights On Indicator .................................... 77
Turn Signals............................................. 126
Limitations for Manual Operation .......... 190
Load Limits................................................ 223
Locking and Unlocking ............................ 105
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 113
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 112
From Inside.............................................. 111
From Outside........................................... 107
Keys ........................................................ 105
Using a Key ............................................. 110
Lockout Prevention System...................... 110
Low Battery Charge (12 volt) ................... 337
Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 73
Low Keyless Access Remote Signal
Strength .................................................. 106
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 75, 337
Low Temperature Indicator....................... 79
Lower Anchor ............................................. 59
Lubricant Specifications Chart................. 346
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 223
M
Maintenance............................................. 259
Battery .................................................... 303
Brake Fluid .............................................. 280
Cleaning ................................................. 306
Climate Control....................................... 305
Coolant................................................... 277
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 263
Oil........................................................... 272
Precautions ............................................. 260
Radiator .................................................. 278
Remote Transmitter................................. 304
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 282
Safety...................................................... 261
Service Items ........................................... 266
Tires ........................................................ 294
Transmission Fluid ................................... 279
Under the Hood ...................................... 268
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 263
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 71, 338
Map Lights ................................................ 141
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 223
Index
Key Number Tag ......................................
Keyless Access System ..............................
Keyless Lockout Prevention.....................
Keys...........................................................
Lockout Prevention .................................
Number Tag............................................
Rear Door Won’t Open ...........................
Remote Transmitter ................................
Types and Functions ................................ 105
Won’t Turn................................................ 24
Kickdown .................................................. 230
361
Meters, Gauges ........................................... 86
Mirrors....................................................... 133
Adjusting................................................. 133
Door........................................................ 134
Exterior.................................................... 134
Interior Rearview...................................... 133
Modifications (and Accessories)............... 257
Moonroof.................................................. 123
MP3.................................................... 165, 173
Multi-Information Display.......................... 87
Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 253
N
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 348
O
Index
362
Odometer.................................................... 89
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 272
Adding .................................................... 274
Checking ................................................. 273
Displaying Oil Life .................................... 264
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 75, 337
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 272
Viscosity .................................................. 272
Opening/Closing
Hood ....................................................... 269
Moonroof................................................ 123
Power Windows ...................................... 120
Trunk....................................................... 114
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel ....................................... 124
Outside Temperature
Adjusting .................................................. 90
Overheating.............................................. 335
P
Paddle Shifters (Sequential Shift Mode)... 20
Pandora®................................................... 171
Panic Mode ............................................... 119
Parking...................................................... 252
Parking Brake ........................................... 248
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator............................................ 70, 339
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 51
Passing Indicators ..................................... 126
Power Windows ....................................... 120
Precautions While Driving ....................... 229
Rain ........................................................ 229
Pregnant Women ....................................... 37
Puncture (Tire).................................. 313, 322
R
Radiator .................................................... 278
Radio (AM/FM) ......................................... 161
Radio (XM®) .............................................. 163
Radio Data System (RDS) ......................... 162
Range .......................................................... 91
RDS (Radio Data System) ......................... 162
Readiness Code (Emissions Testing) ........ 351
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button..................................................... 132
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 133
Refueling .................................................. 254
Fuel Gauge ............................................... 86
Gasoline ......................................... 254, 346
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 73
Regulations .............................. 246, 296, 349
Remote Transmitter ................................. 107
Replacement
Battery.................................................... 303
Bulbs ...................................................... 282
Fuses .............................................. 341, 342
Tires........................................................ 300
Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 292
Reporting Safety Defects......................... 350
Resetting a Trip Meter............................... 89
S
Safe Driving................................................ 27
Safety Check............................................... 31
Safety Labels .............................................. 67
Safety Message ............................................ 1
Seat Belts .................................................... 32
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 36
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 34
Checking .................................................. 38
Fastening .................................................. 35
Side Curtain Airbags................................... 49
SMS Text Message ............................ 201, 213
Snow Tires................................................. 302
Spare Tire Kit (Optional) .......................... 313
Spark Plugs................................................ 346
Specifications ............................................ 346
Specified Fuel.................................... 254, 346
Speedometer .............................................. 86
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 39
Starting the Engine .................................. 226
Does Not Start ......................................... 329
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 124
Jump Starting .......................................... 332
Steering Wheel ................................. 124, 132
Adjusting................................................. 132
Stopping.................................................... 252
Summer Tires ............................................ 302
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 42
Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ... 4, 5
System Message Indicator .......................... 76
T
Tachometer ................................................. 86
Temperature
High Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 79
Outside Temperature ................................. 90
Temperature Sensor ................................... 90
Text Message .................................... 201, 213
Time (Setting) ........................................... 104
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 245
Indicator............................................ 76, 340
Tire Repair Kit........................................... 313
Tires........................................................... 294
Air Pressure ..................................... 295, 347
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 294
Inspection ............................................... 294
Labeling .................................................. 295
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 313
Regulations ............................................. 297
Rotation .................................................. 301
Spare Tire Kit (Optional) .......................... 313
Summer .................................................. 302
Tire Chains .............................................. 302
Tire Repair Kit.......................................... 313
Wear Indicators ....................................... 299
Winter..................................................... 302
Tools.......................................................... 312
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 225
Towing Your Vehicle................................ 225
Emergency .............................................. 344
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................................................... 245
Transmission ............................................. 231
Automatic ............................................... 231
Fluid........................................................ 279
Number................................................... 348
Shift Lever Position Indicator...................... 72
Trip Meter................................................... 89
Index
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt ................................................. 61
Pregnant Women...................................... 37
Reminder .................................................. 33
Warning Indicator ............................... 33, 73
Seat Heaters ............................................. 145
Seats.......................................................... 135
Adjusting ................................................ 135
Front Seats.............................................. 135
Seat Heaters ........................................... 145
Security System
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 78
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 79
SEL/RESET Button ....................................... 87
Select Lever ........................................ 20, 231
Operation ......................................... 20, 232
Releasing ................................................ 334
Won’t Move ........................................... 334
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 58
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 155
Setting the Clock...................................... 104
Shift Lever .......................................... 20, 231
Shift Lever Position Indicator .................... 72
Shift Lever Positions
Continuous Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 231
Shifting ..................................................... 231
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 36
Side Airbags ............................................... 46
Cutoff System........................................... 48
Off Indicator ............................................. 48
363
Troubleshooting ....................................... 311
Blown Fuse ...................................... 341, 342
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 25
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 25
Emergency Towing .................................. 344
Engine Does Not Start.............................. 329
Noise When Braking .................................. 25
Overheating............................................. 335
Premium Gasoline.................................... 254
Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 313
Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 24, 112
Shift Lever Won’t Move ........................... 334
Warning Indicators .................................... 70
Trunk ......................................................... 114
Lid ........................................................... 114
Light Bulb ................................................ 346
Turn Signals............................................... 126
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 77
U
Index
Unlocking the Doors................................. 107
Unlocking the Front Doors from the
Inside ......................................................... 17
USB Adapter Cable ........................... 152, 153
USB Flash Drives........................................ 186
Using the Keyless Access System.............. 108
V
Vanity Mirrors ............................................... 7
364
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 348
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 243
Off Button............................................... 244
Off Indicator.............................................. 74
System Indicator........................................ 74
Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 272, 347
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 243
W
Wallpaper ......................................... 100, 157
Wallpaper Setup....................................... 178
Warning and Information Messages......... 81
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 337
Warning Labels........................................... 67
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 353
Watts......................................................... 346
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 299
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 325
Window Washers ..................................... 130
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 281
Switch..................................................... 130
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 120
Windshield................................................ 130
Cleaning ................................................. 309
Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 147
Washer Fluid ........................................... 281
Wiper Blades ........................................... 292
Wipers and Washers................................ 130
Winter Tires.............................................. 302
Snow Tires .............................................. 302
Tire Chains.............................................. 302
Wipers and Washers ................................ 130
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades ................................................... 292
WMA................................................. 165, 173
Worn Tires ................................................ 294
X
XM® Radio ................................................ 163